Fantabulosity logo

menu icon
subscribe
search icon
×

How to Cook Sausage Patties in the Oven

How to Cook Sausage Patties in the Oven

Are you a sausage lover and a fan of sausage patties but dread the mess of cooking them on the stove? This recipe will guide you on how to cook sausage patties in the oven, a method that’s not only hassle-free but also incredibly delicious. Have sausage links? Breakfast sausage links are cooked a bit differently in time but similar in the process.

Baked sausage patty being held by tongs.

Juicy, perfectly cooked sausage patties with a beautiful brown color, all achieved in the convenience of your oven, like when we cook Italian sausages in the oven, baked hot dogs, or even bratwursts in the oven.

The secret is in the even heating of the oven, which cooks the patties to perfection without the splatter or need for constant flipping. Stick around, and you’ll soon be on your way to creating the most irresistible sausage patties in the oven for an easy breakfast (or for any other meal)!

Looking for more ideas on how to cook in the oven and leave the stove off for the night? Check out this guide on The BEST Hamburgers in the Oven to start with. Then if you fancy a steak night, try this process for How to Cook Steak in the Oven. 

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Cuts back on the mess: Cooking sausage patties in the oven is so much less messy than cooking them on the stove.
  • Works for other patties: You can also use the same method to cook other types of patties in the oven.
  • Ready in only 20 minutes: Cooking in the oven is a little slower but they will still be ready in less than 20 minutes.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted the only ingredient below with some relevant notes.

Store-bought, packaged sausage patties, sitting on the kitchen counter.
  • Patties – Use your favorite pork sausage patties for this recipe then you can serve them any way you like.

Equipment

You’ll need a baking sheet large enough to space out the patties so that they aren’t touching. Cover this with parchment paper to stop them from sticking to the pan.

If you don’t have a traditional baking sheet, don’t fret! There are a few other types of baking pans that can work just as well for making oven-baked sausage patties:

  • Roasting Pan: These come with a rack that allows for heat to circulate all around the patties, ensuring an even cook and that beautiful brown color we love.
  • Cast Iron Skillet: This sturdy pan holds heat very well, which can give your sausage patties a nice sear while they cook in the oven.
  • Silicone Baking Mat: If you don’t have parchment paper, try a reusable silicone baking mat. It’s non-stick and can easily fit into any baking sheet or pan you have. The best part is it makes for an easy cleanup.

How to Make Sausage Patties in the Oven

This process is broken into 2 components:

  • Prepare the baking sheet
  • Cook the patties and serve

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Heat the oven. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

STEP 2: Arrange the meat. Arrange the sausage patties on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, ensuring they are not touching each other.

Raw sausage breakfast patties on baking sheet, on top of parchment paper.

STEP 3: Cook the patties. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees and bake for 15-20 minutes, flipping halfway through. For that perfect golden look, broil them for the last couple of minutes.

Breakfast sausage patties baked in the oven on the baking sheet.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Monitor the broiling closely: For the best results when broiling the sausage patties for that perfect golden brown look, keep a close eye on them to prevent burning. Everyone’s oven is different, and they can go from golden to burnt in no time.
  • Flipping Patties: Use a spatula or tongs for flipping the patties. This will ensure that they don’t break apart and retain their shape.
  • Variety Matters: It’s a good idea to experiment with different types of sausage patties. Each variety yields its unique texture and flavor when cooked in the oven.
  • Spice It Up: If you prefer your sausage patties a bit spicy, consider adding a dash of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes before cooking. 
  • Don’t Overcrowd: Ensure the raw sausage patties are not touching each other on the baking sheet. This allows for even cooking and browning.

Recipe FAQs

Can I use this oven method for cooking frozen sausage patties?

Yes, absolutely. You can cook frozen sausage patties in the oven without thawing them first. However, you may need to extend the cooking time by a few minutes

How can I tell when my sausage patties are cooked completely in the oven?

The best way to ensure your sausage patties are cooked thoroughly is to use a meat thermometer. The internal temperature of the patties should reach 160 degrees Fahrenheit. 

Can I use aluminum foil instead of parchment paper?

Yes, you can indeed use aluminum foil if you don’t have parchment paper. However, for the best non-stick results, consider lightly greasing the aluminum foil with a little bit of oil or cooking spray.

What other seasonings can be used on sausage patties?

The beauty of homemade sausage patties is the flexibility in seasoning. You can use herbs like sage, thyme, rosemary, black pepper, or spices like garlic powder, onion powder, or smoked paprika. 

Why are my sausage patties sticking to the pan even though I used parchment paper?

This could happen if the oven temperature is too low or if the patties are not flipped halfway through the cooking process. Make sure to flip the patties and increase the oven temperature slightly if needed.

What to Serve with Sausage Patties

Sausage patties are incredibly versatile and can be paired with a multitude of dishes. Here are a few serving suggestions:

  1. Breakfast Platter: Serve the sausage patties alongside scrambled eggs, crispy hash browns, and fresh fruits for a hearty breakfast.
  2. Patty Sandwich: Place a hot sausage patty between two slices of toasty bread, add a slice of cheese, and you have a quick and yummy breakfast sandwich and an easy meal. These Hawaiian roll breakfast sliders are a great recipe for sausage patties!
  3. Patties and Pancakes: For a sweet and savory combination, serve these patties with fluffy pancakes drizzled with maple syrup. 
  4. Sausage and Salad: If you’re looking for a lighter option, pair the sausage patties with a fresh garden salad.
  5. Biscuits and Gravy: Incorporate the sausage patties into a classic southern dish, biscuits and classic white gravy. A generous dollop of sausage gravy on top of a flaky biscuit, alongside our oven-baked sausage patties, is a match made in heaven. This biscuit and gravy casserole uses ground sausage but can be a great way to use sausage patties too.

Remember, the beauty of this recipe is its versatility, so feel free to get creative and pair these sausage patties with your favorite dishes!

Storage

Leftovers: Storing cooked sausage patties is incredibly simple and convenient. Allow the patties to cool completely before storing them. Once cooled, you can place them in an airtight container or a zip-top freezer bag. They will last in the refrigerator for up to four days. 

Can you freeze sausage patties? Yes, you can absolutely freeze cooked sausage patties! This is a fantastic way to have a quick and delicious meal option on hand. To freeze the patties, lay them flat in a single layer on a baking sheet and place them in the freezer for one to two hours, or until they’re fully frozen. Once frozen, transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container. Be sure to squeeze out any excess air to prevent freezer burn. 

Frozen cooked sausage patties can be kept in the freezer for up to two months.

Thaw: When you’re ready to enjoy them, thaw them in the refrigerator overnight and reheat them in the oven or microwave.

More Sausage Recipes You’ll Love

If you still have the urge for more delicious recipes with sausage, then next time go beyond the patties! You could try this Easy Sausage Pasta Bake recipe as a great evening meal for the whole family. Or you could make some Breakfast Pigs in a Blanket as a fun breakfast option that the kids will love.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Cooked sausage patty being held by tongs.
Print Pin
5 from 8 votes

How to Cook Sausage Patties in the Oven

It's easy to cook sausage patties in the oven! No grease popping on the stovetop and they still get that golden brown color. Such a great option for making breakfast even easier.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 8 patties
Calories 0.4kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 packet sausage patties
  • biscuits for making a sandwich optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Arrange the sausage patties on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, ensuring they are not touching each other.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees and bake for 15-20 minutes, flipping halfway through. For that perfect golden look, broil them for the last couple of minutes.

Video

Nutrition

Serving: 1patty | Calories: 0.4kcal | Protein: 0.02g | Fat: 0.03g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 0.1mg | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 0.3mg | Vitamin A: 0.1IU | Vitamin C: 0.001mg | Calcium: 0.01mg | Iron: 0.001mg

Salmon Sliders

These salmon sliders start by baking the fish in the oven, and then topping them with a wonderful garlic aioli, crunchy bacon, and your favorite toppings, all served on a slider bun. It’s a sandwich recipe that will be great as a hearty appetizer or even a light lunch or dinner.

Slider recipes are extremely popular around here. Our cheeseburger sliders were the first fan-favorite and these fish sliders offer a fried option of a seafood slider. But don’t miss these Italian sliders, fried chicken sliders, turkey sliders, sloppy joe sliders, and even breakfast sliders to get your slider fix.

Salmon sliders on wooden cutting board.

There’s just something about mini foods, am I right? A slider is just so much fun and the perfect bite for game day or when hosting a party.

With these mini salmon burgers you can have fun topping them with your favorite slider toppings, the garlic aioli sauce we give you below, or serve them your favorite way.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Finger food friendly: Sliders are the perfect party food for people to grab while headed to the couch.
  • Make extras: The garlic aioli is perfect for salmon sliders sauce, but it makes a lot and can be enjoyed on anything!
  • Easily customizable: Feel free to use your favorite sauce, seasonings, herbs, lettuce, etc.

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for salmon sliders, that are sitting on marble counter.
  • Salmon – Look for beautiful filets that will hold their shape. You’ll be cutting them down to slider size. Make sure and check for any pin bones! If you have extra salmon, this salmon cooked with lemon pepper is a great option too.
  • Buns – Slider buns are cute little buns you can hold with one hand. Find them in the bread aisle, at the bakery, or even make your own!
  • Mayo – Select your favorite mayo that you love on its own, as we will be gently altering the taste with garlic.
  • Lemon – Fresh lemon is really necessary here! You’ll zest and juice one and slice another.
  • BLT – We are adding bacon, lettuce, and tomato to our salmon for amazing layers of texture!

📖 Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Arugula – this fresh green is often described as lemony or peppery, and it might not be your cup of tea. Use any sort of baby green you prefer, such as baby kale or spinach.
  • Bacon – use thick, thin, smoked, regular – but make sure it is cooked crisp for a great added texture to your slider. If you don’t eat pork, feel free to use turkey bacon.

📖 Variations

  • Salmon flavor – I used garlic lemon to pair with the homemade aioli, but you could also try Teriyaki or Cajun salmon, and add a sauce that pairs nicely. You may also like hot sauce if you’re the spicy type but we save that for buffalo chicken sliders.

What’s the difference between a salmon slider and salmon burger? Salmon sliders are smaller and multiple can be considered a serving, or sliders are great small bites as an appetizer or even a side dish. Also, most salmon burgers are made from canned salmon that is mashed up with the mayo inside.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Salmon Sliders

This salmon sliders recipe is broken into 3 components:

  • mix up aioli
  • cook the salmon and
  • assemble!

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 of making salmon sliders.

STEP 1. Make the aioli. Add all ingredients for aioli in a mixing bowl. Use a whisk or spatula to incorporate everything well (Images 1 & 2). Let chill in the fridge.

STEP 2. Prepare salmon. Place cut filets on a lined baking sheet and add seasoning (Image 3). Add butter and lemon slices to each filet (Image 4) then bake.

Tip: Cut your salmon into perfect-sized filets for your buns. Keep in mind they may shrink up just a bit when cooked.

Steps 5- 8 of how to make salmon sliders.

STEP 3. Assemble. Spread some of the aioli on both bun halves (your desired amount) and place one on a plate (Image 5).

STEP 4. Veggies. Add arugula and tomato, then the cooked salmon (Images 6 & 7).

STEP 5. Bacon. Top with bacon and then add the second bun, aioli side down (Image 8.)

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Make fresh. While the other ingredients are cold, I recommend baking and serving the salmon hot on the sliders.
  • Best buns. The larger Hawaiian slider buns are the for the perfect soft bun. (Not the small mini sliders unless you plan to cut the pieces of salmon in to really small pieces.) You can also find fresh sliders at the bakery.
Salmon sliders on white platter.

📋 Recipe FAQs

Should I eat salmon slider warm or cold?

Salmon sliders are best served when the salmon is still warm from the heat of the oven. The other ingredients are meant to be cold, though. 

If your sliders cool off or if you decide to store leftovers in the fridge, I do not recommend attempting to reheat them. Just enjoy them cold!

What is another variation I can make?

I did a lemon-garlic salmon here but you could easily fill these sliders with another flavor profile. Use any salmon recipe you’d like! I bet Cajon or teriyaki salmon would be delicious. Just be sure to cut the fish down to slider-size. 

Can I make this ahead of time and freeze it?

Yes and no. While I do not suggest assembling the sandwiches or making the aioli ahead of time and freezing them (they just won’t thaw well) you can do so with the salmon. Season and bake the salmon as you normally would, allow it to cool completely, seal it in an airtight container, and store it in the freezer for up to 3 months. 

When you are ready to make some tasty salmon sliders, allow the fish to thaw in the fridge, whip up the aioli, and assemble as you normally would. 

What is garlic aioli?

Traditionally, garlic was added to oil and emulsified, no yolk! But nowadays, an aioli pretty much refers to mayo with yummy flavors added.

🍽 What Goes With Salmon Sliders?

A salmon sandwich goes well with sweet potato fries in the air fryer. You could also bake your own ranch potato wedges (perfect for dipping in the garlic aioli!). A classic green salad is also perfect on the side.

Salmon sliders on wooden cutting board.

❄️ Storage

Once these sliders are assembled, they are best enjoyed right away. If you find yourself with leftovers, however, allow them to cool completely before arranging them in a single layer in an airtight container. You can keep them in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just note that the buns and the veggies will start to get soggy. 

These mini salmon sandwiches do not reheat well. So if you do end up storing them in the fridge for a bit, I suggest enjoying the leftovers cold. 

🥪 More Slider Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Salmond slider with garlic aioli, tomato and lettuce.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Salmon Sliders

These salmon sliders are so easy to make and flavorful! Bake the fish in the oven and top it with the delicious garlic aioli, your favorite toppings, and assembled on slider buns.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 sliders
Calories 813kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

For the garlic aioli

  • 1 cup mayonnaise
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 2 teaspoons garlic minced
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ tablespoon chopped fresh parsley

For the salmon

  • 2 pounds salmon cut square to fit your slider buns
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon Italian seasoning
  • 1 lemon thinly sliced
  • ½ cup butter cut into slices
  • 2 sprigs rosemary

To assemble

  • 4 slider buns
  • 1 cup arugula
  • 4 thin slices of tomato
  • 8 slices crisp bacon

Instructions

  • Prep. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and line a baking tray with a sheet with parchment paper.
  • Make the aioli. mix together the mayo, lemon zest, lemon juice, garlic, salt, pepper, Dijon, and parsley until smooth. Cover and chill in the refrigerator while you make the salmon.
  • Bake the salmon. Arrange the salmon pieces on the prepared baking sheet. Season the salmon with salt, pepper, and Italian seasoning. Scatter the lemon slices, butter, and finely chop rosemary over the salmon. Bake for 20 minutes in the preheated oven.
  • Assemble the sliders. Remove the top halves of the slider buns, spread a bit of garlic aioli over them, and layer the ingredients into the buns in the following order: arugula, tomato, salmon, bacon. Slather the top halves of the buns with aioli and place them, aioli-side-down on top of the sliders to close them. Skewer the slider with a sandwich pick to hold them together.

Notes

  • These mini salmon sandwiches do not reheat well. So if you do end up storing them in the fridge for a bit, I suggest enjoying the leftovers cold.
  • You will not use all of the aioli on these sandwiches so enjoy it for the rest of the week on these crab cake sandwiches or on these bratwursts in the oven.

Nutrition

Serving: 1slider | Calories: 813kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 54g | Fat: 55g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 15g | Monounsaturated Fat: 18g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 190mg | Sodium: 1316mg | Potassium: 1361mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 889IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 4mg

Pizza Monkey Bread

This pepperoni pizza monkey bread (or “monkey pizzas” as some call it) is a delicious blend of bread, pepperoni, parmesan cheese, marinara sauce, mozzarella cheese, and Italian seasoning, baked in a bundt pan creating a delicious appetizer recipe!

With only a 10 minute prep time, and 40 minute bake time, this easy bread recipe is just about as easy as our pizza bagels and pairs perfectly with this side salad recipe!

Pizza Monkey Bread Dipping in Marinara Sauce

Like with classic monkey bread, this pull apart pepperoni bread is delicious all year long, especially around the holidays and during the summer when you want something quick and light for a main course! Similar to our French bread pizza recipe, it’s an easy one that you can make any time of year.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧾 Ingredients

We like to keep things really easy around here so this easy recipe uses store-bought frozen bread dough! You can also use biscuit pieces if that’s what you have on hand! Then, pick out your favorite pizza toppings if they differ from the list below!

Ingredients on table for pizza bread
  • frozen bread dough (thawed 8-12 hours) 
  • olive oil
  • Italian seasoning
  • garlic
  • mozzarella cheese (shredded)
  • parmesan cheese
  • pepperoni slices
  • marinara sauce
  • fresh basil (optional garnish)

See full, printable recipe card below for quantities and instructions!

👩🏻‍🍳 Step by Step Instructions

  1. NOTE: Make sure you allow enough time to thaw frozen bread dough
    Thaw frozen bread dough out according to package directions – or you can put the 2 loaves of frozen bread dough on a plate loosely covered with plastic wrap on the counter overnight to allow the bread dough to thaw completely.  This works great if you are baking early in the day.  Or, if baking later in the day, plan to allow the dough to thaw for 8-12 hours.

Before beginning, heat oven to 350 degrees and spray a bundt pan with cooking spray. (If you don’t have a bundt can, there are optional 9×13 baking pan instructions below.)

Steps 1-4 of how to make pizza monkey bread.

How to Bake

  1. In a large bowl, mix olive oil, garlic, and Italian seasoning together.
  2. Break the bread dough into golf ball size balls.
  3. Stir dough balls in the olive oil mixture. 
Steps 5- 8 of how to make pizza monkey bread.
  1. Add cheeses, pepperoni, and 1 cup of marinara.
  2. Stir together well and then pour this mixture into the bundt pan. 
  1. Let it sit for about 15 minutes until doubled in size. 
  1. Bake at 350 degrees for 35-40 minutes and it should be golden brown.
Baked pizza monkey bread
  1. Take it out of the oven and put it on a cooling rack. Let it sit for 10 minutes.
  2. Then turn the monkey bread out onto a serving dish and enjoy!  Serve with extra marinara sauce.

🥫 Dipping Sauce Ideas:

If you’d love to dip your “stuffed pizza bread” in to a delicious sauce, these are our favorites:

Pull apart pepperoni pizza monkey bread

📖 Substitutions

  1. What if I don’t have cloves of garlic?  In this recipe, you could substitute ¼ teaspoon garlic powder, ½ teaspoon minced garlic (or garlic flakes).  Do not substitute garlic salt as this will make the recipe too salty.  
  2. I don’t have Italian seasoning- what else could I use?  In this recipe, you could substitute 2 teaspoons of oregano. 

🍄 Pizza Topping Ideas

Want to add your favorite toppings instead of pepperoni? That’s absolutely ok! Just make sure if you add different meats, that they’re already fully cooked before adding them to this bundt pan pizza to avoid any undercooking with the provided directions.

Here are other pizza topping ideas to consider:

  • sausage
  • bacon
  • bell peppers
  • mushrooms
  • black olives
  • ham
  • hamburger
  • onions
  • jalapenos
  • red pepper flakes

🧈 Optional Buttery Crust

If you want to kick things up a notch, you can add a buttery crust topping for some extra flavor! Here’s how:

Using a small bowl, mix together a little melted butter and garlic powder. Lightly brush the butter mixture on top of the cooked, pizza crust. Sprinkle with extra parmesan cheese.

❄️ Storage

Refrigerate this pizza monkey bread in an airtight container or wrap securely in aluminum foil for up to 3 days. Or, you may freeze it for up to 3 months. 

💡 Expert Tips:

Does the pizza dough have to be perfectly round?

No, but it’s important that the bread pieces are close in size so they bake evenly.

How do you heat up monkey bread?

It reheats really well in the microwave or, like with pizza, it reheats well in the air fryer so it gives that crispy texture of the original!

Can I make monkey bread without a bundt pan?

YES! If you don’t have a bundt pan to make this pull-apart bread, you can use a 9×13 baking dish instead and will have a baking time of 30 minutes instead.

I know you love easy recipes as much as we do, so you’ll also love this focaccia bread, pizza hot dog, and this homemade soft pretzel recipe! Or, if you need a bread side dish recipe, you can’t go wrong with this cheesy pull-apart bread.

Recipe

pizza monkey bread
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Pizza Monkey Bread

This pepperoni pizza monkey bread is a delicious blend of bread, parmesan cheese, marinara sauce, pepperoni, mozzarella cheese and italian seasoning, baked in a bundt pan creating a delicious appetizer recipe!
Course Appetizer, Main Course
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 10 servings
Calories 224kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • oven

Ingredients

  • 2 loaves frozen bread dough thawed (allow 8-12 hours)
  • 3 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • 2 cloves garlic
  • 3 cups mozzarella cheese shredded
  • ¼ cup parmesan cheese grated or shredded
  • 1 cup pepperoni chopped or sliced thin
  • 3 cups marinara sauce 1 cup in bread, 2 cups for dipping
  • fresh basil if desired, chopped

Instructions

Thaw Frozen Bread Dough

  • Thaw frozen bread dough for 8-12 hours prior to cooking.

How to Bake

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees
  • Spray a bundt pan with non-stick spray. 
  • In a large mixing bowl, mix olive oil, garlic, and italian seasoning together.
  • Break the bread dough into golf ball size balls.
  • Stir bread balls in the olive oil mixture. 
  • Add cheeses, pepperoni, and 1 cup of marinara and stir together well and then pour this mixture into the bundt pan. 
  • Let it sit for about 15 minutes until doubled in size. 
  • Bake at 350 degrees for 35-40 minutes.
  • Take it out of the oven and put it on a cooling rack.
  • Let it sit for 10 minutes and then turn the monkey bread out onto a serving dish and enjoy!
  • Serve with extra marinara sauce or desired dipping sauce!

Notes

Does the bread dough have to be perfect balls? 
No but you do need to make sure they’re about the same size so they bake evenly.
Can I make money bread without a bundt pan?
YES! If you don’t have a bundt pan to make this pull-apart bread, you can use a 9×13 baking dish instead and will have a baking time of 30 minutes instead.
How to Store Leftover:
Store any leftovers in an airtight container or securely wrapped with aluminum foil for 3-4 days in the refrigerator.
How do you reheat monkey bread?
It reheats really well in the microwave or, like with pizza, it reheats well in the air fryer so it gives that crispy outside texture and soft center like the original!
Additional Topping Ideas:
  • sausage
  • bacon
  • bell peppers
  • mushrooms
  • black olives
  • ham
  • hamburger
  • onions
  • jalapenos
  • red pepper flakes

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 224kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 836mg | Potassium: 310mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 572IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 219mg | Iron: 1mg

Creamy Taco Soup

Creamy Taco Soup: Get ready to add this comforting fall and winter soup to your weekly dinner menu! It’s easy to make, ready in under an hour, kid-friendly, and uses just a few ingredients! It’s definitely one of our favorite go-to soup recipes to make at home.

Creamy taco soup in white bowl.

Taco recipes, like this taco chicken casserole and these crispy chicken tacos, are another way to enjoy tacos for dinner, by using chicken if you have that on hand as well!

Soup recipes like this classic chili, white chicken chili, and lasagna soup, are amazing during the cooler months. However, taco recipes are delicious all year long, so having tacos in soup form, during the fall and winter is a wonderful bonus.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: Yes! Only a few ingredients are needed for this creamy taco soup, and you probably even have most, if not all of these ingredients on hand.
  • Make-ahead recipe: Sometimes making soups in advance is a great way to meal prep but soups can sometimes marry together even better when made early, and they sit together to blend.
  • Ready in under an hour: Talk about a quick and easy dinner idea! This recipe, from start to finish, is the perfect option for a busy night for dinner. This tortellini soup is ready in just under an hour too, so it’s also a great option.

Ingredients Needed

As you can see below, the ingredients are pretty basic and they’re great to keep on hand for a last-minute dinner idea.

Ingredients for creamy taco soup on marble counter.

Substitutions

If you find that substitutions are needed, such as you’re missing an ingredient or you prefer to leave something out, that’s perfectly fine! Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Ground beef – Ground chicken, ground pork, ground venison or even tofu can be used in this taco soup recipe. Or, you can also leave the meat out if you prefer, and save it for this fun walking taco casserole!
  • Broth – Vegetable broth, chicken broth (or my easy chicken broth recipe), or a low-sodium broth can be used instead.
  • Taco seasoning – We love making our own chicken taco seasoning and that can also be used in this recipe, instead of the packet.
  • Rotel – There are versions of “hot” diced green chilies and tomatoes that you can use also, to add more heat.

How to Make Creamy Taco Soup

Would you believe there are only two parts to making this soup? Cooking the ground beef, and then combining that with the rest of the ingredients, allowing it to simmer and cook together. It doesn’t get much easier than that!

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 how to make creamy taco soup.

STEP 1. Cook the ground beef. In a stockpot, brown ground beef until fully cooked. Drain excess grease (Image 1).

STEPS 2 & 3. Add the remaining ingredients to cooked ground beef (Images 2&3).

STEP 4. Cook and simmer. Cook on medium heat for 25-30 minutes or until cream cheese has melted and blended in, stirring occasionally. Note: Sometimes using a whisk at the end of the cooking time, speeds this up. (Image 4.)

Creamy taco soup in white bowl, next to lime and potato chips.

Serve warm, and as is, or top with your favorite toppings! See ideas below:

Taco Soup Topping Ideas – If you prefer to add some toppings to your soup, here are some great ideas:

  • sour cream
  • shredded cheese
  • tortilla chips
  • wonton strips
  • corn chips
  • green onions
  • taco sauce
  • hot sauce
  • guacamole
  • homemade croutons
Spoon lifting out a bite of creamy taco soup, out of small white bowl.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Allow soup to simmer. If you have time, allowing a soup to simmer for an hour can make the flavors blend together even more!
  • Slow Cooker Creamy Taco Soup. Love Crock Pot recipes? Brown your ground beef and then place all of the ingredients in a slow cooker and allow the soup to cook together, and the cream cheese to melt, on low for at least 3 hours.

Recipe FAQs

How do you make soup more creamy?

Cream cheese is added to soup to make it more creamy. Heavy cream, sour cream, and other thickening items can make soup more creamy.

Why is my taco soup so watery?

If the corn wasn’t drained, this could make your taco soup more watery or perhaps water was added when it wasn’t supposed to be.

What is the best way to eat taco soup?

The best way to eat taco soup is warm. Serving with your favorite taco toppings and side dishes is also a great way to eat taco soup.

What to Serve with this Soup

Taco side dishes can go great with this taco soup, such as hot taco dip, guacamole or even a crusty Italian bread for dipping. Or, go all out for taco night and make this fried taco recipe to serve with the soup.

However, easy sandwiches such as this peanut butter and syrup sandwich offer a sweet combo with the salty soup.

Storage

Leftovers: If you have leftover creamy taco soup, once it has cooled, you can store it in an airtight container and place in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.

Freeze: If you prefer to freeze the leftovers, or saving for meal planning freezer meals, this soup freezes really well. Once it has cooled, place it in a freezer-safe container and freeze for up to 3 months.

Thaw: To thaw this soup, place in the refrigerator to thaw, or place frozen soup in a stock post and reheat/melt over low heat, slowly.

More Recipes You’ll Love

If you love easy soup recipes, that feature similar ingredients, then you’re also going to love this easy ham and beans recipe too! Or if you find that you like using ground beef for a lot of your dinners, then you’ll love this list of ground beef dinner ideas.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Creamy taco soup serving in white bowl.
Print Pin
4.38 from 8 votes

Creamy Taco Soup

Creamy taco soup is easy to make and has tons of taco flavor, with hearty ground beef, beans, tomatoes, in a creamy base.
Course Soup
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 315kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 pound ground beef
  • 1 ounce pack of taco seasoning
  • 8 ounces cream cheese cut in to small blocks
  • 4 cups beef broth
  • 10 ounce can Rotel
  • 15.25 ounce can corn drained
  • 15.5 ounce can chili beans

Optional Toppings:

  • tortilla chips
  • sour cream
  • shredded cheese
  • jalapenos
  • avocado

Instructions

  • In a stockpot, brown ground beef until fully cooked.
  • Add remaining ingredients in to cooked ground beef.
  • Cook on medium heat for 25-30 minutes, or until cream cheese has melted, and blended in, stirring occasionally. (Sometimes using a whisk at the end of the cook time, speeds this up.)
  • Serve alone or with optional toppings.

Video

Notes

Leftovers: If you have leftover creamy taco soup, once it has cooled, you can store it in an airtight container and place in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
Freeze: If you prefer to freeze the leftovers, or saving for meal planning freezer meals, this soup freezes really well. Once it has cooled, place it in a freezer-safe container and freeze for up to 3 months.
Thaw: To thaw this soup, place in the refrigerator to thaw, or place frozen soup in a stock post and reheat/melt over low heat, slowly.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving (⅙ recipe) | Calories: 315kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 90mg | Sodium: 1146mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 952IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 2mg

Hamburger Mac and Cheese

Hamburger Mac and Cheese Recipe: Forget the Hamburger Helper and get this dinner recipe on the table in less than thirty minutes with this super simple hamburger mac and cheese recipe. This homemade version is better than the boxed version,

Easy, cheesy, quick and easy? What more could you want for a weeknight one-skillet dinner recipe? It’s similar to our Instant Pot Cheeseburger Macaroni that has gone viral for years!

Wooden spoon holding hamburger mac and cheese.

Obsessed with one pan or one pot meals like I am? I love how easy the delicious recipes make chaotic evenings. Two of my favorite delicious comfort foods include this Cheesy Rice recipe and this One Pan Pork Chops and Veggies recipe. They’re delicious during the fall months, as well as all of our casserole recipes, and of course these old-fashioned sloppy joes on a cool night.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It’s ready fast: This easy homemade hamburger helper recipe comes together in 20 minutes or less.
  • Uses minimal dishes: This one-skillet dinner requires only a chopping board, knife, skillet, bowl, measuring cup, and cooking utensil of your choice.
  • It’s family-friendly: It is perfect for busy weeknights and a dinner your children will actually eat that the entire family will love.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic and you might already have them at home!

Labeled ingredients for hamburger mac and cheese.
  • Ground Beef – Keep in mind that the leaner the meat, the less grease you’ll end up with. Lean ground beef will yield less grease than 80/20 ground beef. Either way, we always suggest draining the excess liquid after cooking the meat.
  • Elbow Macaroni – While any noodle option will suffice, elbow macaroni are a classic and what is used in traditional Hamburger Helper and that is why we went with them! We love using this type of noodle in our old-fashioned recipes – like in this macaroni and tomatoes recipe!
  • Cream Cheese – Cream cheese makes this recipe super creamy and delicious.
  • Diced Tomatoes – We opt for pre-diced, canned tomatoes for this. It’s all about making dinner easier so why not?
  • Shredded Cheddar Cheese – Again, opt for the pre-shredded cheese at the grocery store. Save yourself the additional time and clean up.
  • Sweet Onion – This is where so much of the flavor in this recipe comes from. While you could go with a yellow or white onion, the sweet diced onions provides the superior flavor.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Meat – If you’re not a fan of ground beef, or you want to go with a healthier option, go for some ground turkey. You’ll find less fat in that option and save some calories.
  • Dairy – If you’re trying to stay away from dairy products, you can easily make this recipe dairy-free by opting for dairy-free cream cheese and cheese, as well as opting for non-dairy milks over the heavy cream mentioned in the recipe.
  • Noodles – Rotini, ziti, bowtie, or shell noodles can be used instead.
  • Tomatoes – Substitute the tomatoes with 3 tablespoons of tomato sauce if you like the tomato flavor but not the texture of tomatoes in your mac and cheese.
  • Cheese – Cheddar cheese with Monterey jack or Colby jack cheese can be used instead.
  • Onions – You can substitute sweet onion with white or yellow onion.
  • Heavy Cream – Whole milk or half and half can be used instead of heavy cream if preferred.
  • Broth – Feel free to use water, vegetable broth, turkey broth, or chicken broth. You can even make my homemade chicken broth recipe.

Variations

There are so many variations you could add to this recipe. It is pretty versatile!

  • Adding Veggies – This recipe doesn’t include vegetables, but you could easily add in some prechopped bell preppers (saute them first and then add them back in at the end) or even some spinach! Some diced green chiles could add some great flavor as well.
  • Change Up the Cooking Method – You can also make this hamburger mac and cheese in a large pot instead of a skillet. No difference in instructions or ingredients. You can also bake the cooked hamburger mac and cheese in your oven in a 9×9 baking dish with breadcrumbs or crumbles on top at 375 for 10 minutes or just long enough to brown the bread crumble toppings.
  • Adding Seasonings – You could add some onion powder and garlic powder when cooking the meat to add some extra flavor.
  • Top it Off – Sauces can really upgrade this recipe! Some hot sauce goes a long way. Top your serving with your favorite hot sauce for a kick!

How to Make Hamburger Mac and Cheese

Putting this homemade cheeseburger macaroni recipe together is super simple and oh-so fast!

This Hamburger Mac and Cheese is broken into 4 components:

  • cooking the macaroni noodles
  • cooking the beef
  • adding in the cheeses
  • tying everything together

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

You’ll start this recipe by cooking the noodles in a large skillet before sticking them aside and cooking the ground beef in the same skillet. We’re going for minimal dish cleanup here!

Steps 1-4 of how to make hamburger mac and cheese.

STEP 1. Cook the noodles. In an extra-large skillet, cook uncooked pasta in beef broth for about 10 minutes or until tender, if you prefer al dente noodles you can reduce that time to 6 minutes. Once cooked place them in a large bowl and set them aside in the broth to prevent sticking. (Image 1).

STEP 2. Cooking the ground beef with the onions. Place ground beef and onion into the skillet. Break up the ground beef and cook over medium heat until browned and cooked throughout. The onions should be tender but not burnt. Drain any excess liquid from the skillet. (Image 2).

Tip: Cooking the ground beef with the onions adds some additional flavor to the meat and saves time. If you’d prefer, you would caramelize the onions in the pan first and then add the ground beef.

STEP 3. Adding in the cheeses. Reduce heat to low and stir in cheddar cheese, cream cheese, salt, butter, and heavy cream. Stir continuously until the cheese has melted and all ingredients are smooth and creamy. (Image 3).

STEP 4. Combining all. Add drained noodles and diced tomato to the beef and cheese mixture and stir well until combined. (Image 4).

Mixed hamburger with cheese in skillet.

STEP 5. Serve. Serve warm in the skillet.

Cooked hamburger mac and cheese on wooden spatula.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Serve warm and fresh. Serving this dish warm provides the best flavor and texture.
  • Drain the liquid. After cooking the ground beef and onions, make sure to fully drain the liquid before moving on to the next step.

Recipe FAQs

Can I eat this warm or cold?

This hamburger mac and cheese should be enjoyed warm.

What is another variation I can make?

You can also make this hamburger mac and cheese in a large pot instead of a skillet. No difference in instructions or ingredients. You can also bake the cooked hamburger mac and cheese in your oven in a 9×9 baking dish with breadcrumbs or crumbles on top at 375 for 10 minutes or just long enough to brown the bread crumble toppings.

What is the best ground beef to use with this recipe?

The best ground beef to use with this hamburger mac and cheese is 80/20 or leaner. You don’t want very fatty beef because the beef will not crumble and distribute evenly throughout the mac and cheese. It will also be greasy.

Do I need to add salt when cooking the noodles?

No, you do not need to add salt when cooking the noodles in the broth. The sodium in the broth is enough for flavor and to prevent the noodles from sticking.

The noodle box instructions say to cook the noodles in less time.

When cooking noodles in broth, it may take additional time for them to soften as opposed to cooking them in water.

My cheese isn’t melting.

Your cheese may not melt well if it was pre-shredded cheese. I recommend shredding the cheese yourself for the quickest cheese melt. Pre-shredded cheese can be coated with agents that prevent it from sticking together when shipping, which also prevents it from melting together when needed.

What to Serve with Hamburger Mac and Cheese

This recipe is great on its own, but it’s even better with sides. I suggest pairing it with either our Homemade Focaccia Bread recipe for yummy dipping or our Air Fryer Zucchini to get the veggies in.

Spoon of hamburger mac and cheese lifting out of bowl.

Storage

Leftovers: This hamburger mac and cheese can be stored in an airtight container in your refrigerator for up to 4 days.

Freeze: Yes, you can make this hamburger mac and cheese ahead of time and freeze it in a freezer-safe container in your freezer for up to 3 months. To thaw, leave the hamburger mac and cheese in the container and place it in your refrigerator for 24-48 hours or until thawed throughout. 

Reheat: To reheat, you can place the thawed hamburger mac and cheese in a pot on your stove and heat it on medium-low until it reaches the desired temperature. You need to stir it continually so that it doesn’t stick to the pot. You can add small amounts of milk and butter to bring it back to the texture and creaminess you want.

Similar Recipes

Looking for more easy dinner recipe options for weeknights similar to this one? I think you’d love these quick and easy dinner recipes!

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Hamburger Mac and Cheese on wooden spoon, lifting out of skillet.
Print Pin
4.75 from 12 votes

Hamburger Mac and Cheese

Easy, one-skillet Hamburger Mac and Cheese with ground beef is ready in twenty minutes or less. Perfect for busy weeknights!
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 8 Servings
Calories 858kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • Large Skillet

Ingredients

  • 1 pound ground beef
  • 16 ounces large elbow noodles
  • 8 ounces cream cheese
  • ¼ cup diced tomatoes
  • 4 cups shredded cheddar cheese
  • ½ sweet onion (chopped)
  • ½ cup butter (one stick)
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ¾ cup heavy cream
  • 5 cups beef broth

Instructions

  • In an extra-large skillet, cook noodles in beef broth for about 10 minutes or until tender, if you prefer al-dente noodles you can reduce that time to 6 minutes. Once cooked place them in a large bowl and set them aside in the broth to prevent sticking.
    16 ounces large elbow noodles, 5 cups beef broth
  • Place ground beef and onion into the skillet. Break up the ground beef and cook over medium heat until browned and cooked throughout. The onions should be tender but not burnt. Drain any excess liquid from the skillet.
    1 pound ground beef, ½ sweet onion
  • Reduce heat to low and stir in cheddar cheese, cream cheese, salt, butter, and heavy cream. Stir continuously until the cheese has melted and all ingredients are smooth and creamy.
    8 ounces cream cheese, 4 cups shredded cheddar cheese, ½ cup butter, 1 teaspoon salt, ¾ cup heavy cream
  • Add drained noodles and diced tomatoes to the beef and cheese mixture and stir well until combined.
    ¼ cup diced tomatoes
  • Serve warm from the skillet.

Notes

Can I freeze this to enjoy later?
This can be made ahead of time and frozen for later. Freeze the fully cooked recipe in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months and thaw in the refrigerator before reheating.
Want to bake this instead? Assemble cooked ground beef and noodles and place in a 9×9 baking dish with breadcrumbs or crumbles on top at 375 for 10 minutes or just long enough to brown the bread crumble toppings.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 858kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 58g | Saturated Fat: 33g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 179mg | Sodium: 1448mg | Potassium: 519mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1638IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 481mg | Iron: 2mg

Mountain Picnic Set Up

This picnic set up on the mountain turned out exactly like I had hoped. The beautiful thing about the whole thing? It only took about 30 minutes to get this all set up and ready for guests.

Planning parties and entertaining doesn’t have to be difficult to create something beautiful. I’m sharing with you the tips that I have and shortcuts that I used to style this picnic on the mountain that feels like a luxury picnic experience.

Picnic set up in a pasture and on a mountain.

Picnics are an amazing idea for big and little events such as, baby showers, bridal showers, birthday parties, date nights, special anniversary, and even just a small picnic party like we had with friends. (See more video details from our picnic night.)

The Perfect Location

No matter where you live there can be a perfect location for your picnic. Whether that’s:

Close up photo of picnic table, with flowers and candles.

Picnic Colors

When planning this picnic, I knew I wanted to keep the colors soft yet make sure that I had a pop of color so the picnic didn’t blend in completely with the surroundings.

So knowing that the bright red fruits on the charcuterie boards would add that amount of color, I knew the colors of the flowers, pillows, blankets and napkins, could also be soft, yet still colorful.

Decorating Tip:

When deciding on colors for your picnic, it’s important to consider the surroundings of where your picnic will be. Will it be fall, so the colors will be orange, green and reds all around? Springtime, where bright green, whites, and light pinks will be outside? Or perhaps it will be inside and the walls are a certain color, or the furniture is a bright color that will be important to work with.

My biggest tip for working with any color, is to keep the decorations for your picnic, neutral and with greenery as your pop of color. The greenery will provide a pop of color while the neutral colors can blend in with almost any surroundings.

Picnic table set up in field on the mountain.

Picnic Tables

The picnic table that I used for this picnic is one that I found online and fell in love with because it folds up for easy storage and you can unscrew the legs and store them inside. Plus, the design of the boards are beautiful, as well as the colors of the wood and it even comes with a carrying handle!

So if your picnic is away from home, this table is easy to take along with you. It also comes with two different sizes of legs, so you can have table with short legs (what you see in the photos), or even shorter legs.

However if you don’t want to use a picnic table like I used here, using pallets is a great way to also set up a space, or using saw horses and a wooden table top (or door, or plywood) like you see in our backyard pop-up dinner party.

Place setting for picnic on the mountain.

Serveware

Since snacking and having cocktails were on the menu, using small plates and mini tongs (similar) were perfect for enjoying the small bites of food.

We also used beautiful french wine glasses (not pictured here – but seen on the Instagram video) for the champange that we thoroughly enjoyed that night.

For the place settings, I thought it would be fun to use kraft gift tags, tie those around the tongs, and write adorable adjectives on each tag, so each guest could choose an adjective for them. (i.e. captivating, exquisite, etc.)

Champagne chilling in drink basket beverage tub.

Drinks

Because I look for an excuse to buy and have pink champagne, it was a must for this mountain picnic.

Chilling it in a woven beverage tub really helped bring in the wood-color from the picnic table. (It has since sold out but here are some other adorable beverage tubs: Jute Robe Beverage Tub and this Rose Copper Tub.

Charcuterie board on picnic table.

Food Ideas

There’s something about a beautiful charcuterie board on a picnic table and have three boards full of our favorite snacks was something we were looking so foward to. Fun tip: See how to make salami roses for a charcuterie board too.

I share a lot of my charcuterie boards on a just-for-fun Charcuterie Board Instagram page, if you’re looking for some ideas!

If charcuterie boards aren’t what you desire for your picnic, other great ideas include:

  • food from your favorite restaurants
  • a home-cooked meal
  • food bar (such as burger-bar, dessert bar, etc.)

Or you’ll find amazing recipes to use in this list of picnic food for couples!

Charcuterie board with meats, vegetables, fruits, and crackers.

Instead of doing one big board, I thought it would be easier to do 3 smaller boards so guests could easily reach the different items. This charcuterie board is similar to 2 of the board sizes/shapes that I used for this spread since they were narrow and longer, so they could be enjoyed more easily by each side of the table.

Dessert charcuterie board with cookies, fruit, chocolates and more.

For the dessert “board” (which I actually used a round marble cake stand) I feel like it gives the table a little height and was a focal point that guests could feel drawn to. (I mean, who doesn’t love sweets?)

Picnic set up ideas.

Decor

For the decor, such as pillows, flowers and accents, I decided to keep it simple, yet classy. If you’ve ever heard “less is more”, I’m a firm believer in that saying and believe it applies to decorating too. Sometimes the surroundings can also be part of the experience.

If you see something I’ve used in this picnic set up that you’d love to get for yourself too, I’ve linked to the items below:

💭 Final Picnic Setup Tips

If you’re hosting a picnic, here are some other tips that will help make your picnic a success:

  • Additional Guests. This setup was made for 6. However if you’re having a larger picnic, make sure to allow enough seating room for the guests. Sitting on the ground will cause the guests to want to stretch out so they’re comfortable so make sure to make room for legs, leaning back, etc.
  • Day of your picnic. Work ahead of time. Doing as much as you can before the day of the picnic, can help lessen the workload on the day of, which can then mean that you can hopefully enjoy the picnic yourself even more!
  • Fresh flowers. Using fresh can be so beautiful and definitely an option. However, I chose to use fake florals so I can reuse them, which is anothe reason why I like to keep colors neutral so they can work for multiple color themes.
  • Bluetooth speaker. Don’t forget the music! Adding music can create a little ambiance. So charge up that bluetooth speaker so it’s ready to go for the special occasion.

Here’s to hoping you have the very best time at your own picnic!

Burger Bombs

This recipe for Burger Bombs with a delicious dipping sauce is a dream come true for burger lovers seeking a fun twist on their favorite meal. The process is easy and the ingredients are simple, making it an ideal dish for both weekday dinners and weekend get-togethers.

You love our baked cheeseburgers and our cheeseburger sliders, so we knew that adding burger bombs to our favorite burgers was a must!

Burger bombs stacked on top of one another.

Inspired to make more fresh burgers? Why not try these Burger Bar Ideas for Your Next Party and make the burgers the food star of the show? Or you could try these Aloha Burgers that are a great change from the classic cheeseburger we all love.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Easy to customize: The recipe is really easy to customize to what you like or what you have around the house.
  • Feed the whole family: If you are feeding the whole family and a few extras, this is a great recipe that makes 20 rolls.
  • Ready in only 40 minutes: With 20 minutes to prepare and the same for cooking time, this recipe doesn’t take long to make

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for burger bombs.
  • Beef – You’ll want juicy ground beef for this recipe as it is easy to work into the right shape for the burger bites.
  • Seasoning – We use steak seasoning to add to the meat to give it a great flavor or you can use seasoning salt.
  • Rolls – Frozen dinner rolls work perfectly for this recipe, just let them thaw first before you start adding ingredients.

📖 Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Ground Beef: You can substitute ground beef with ground turkey or chicken for a leaner option. For a vegetarian alternative, try lentils or a plant-based meat substitute.
  • Minced Garlic: If fresh minced garlic is not available, you can use ⅛ teaspoon of garlic powder in place of each clove, or jarred minced garlic at a 1:1 ratio.
  • Steak Seasoning: In the absence of steak seasoning, you can create your own blend with a mix of salt, black pepper, paprika, garlic powder, onion powder, and a pinch of cayenne.
  • Cheddar Cheese: Feel free to replace cheddar cheese with any melt-able cheese of your preference. Gouda, Monterey Jack, or mozzarella can work well. For a dairy-free option, try a vegan cheese substitute.

📖 Variations

  • Vegetarian Burger Bombs: Substitute the ground beef with a mix of sautéed mushrooms, bell peppers, and onions. Pair with a vegan cheese to create a delicious vegetarian version of these burger bombs.
  • Gluten-Free Burger Bombs: Use gluten-free dinner rolls and ensure all other ingredients including the steak seasoning and Worcestershire sauce are gluten-free.
  • Spicy Burger Bombs: Add a finely chopped jalapeno pepper to the beef mixture for an extra kick, and also consider adding a dash of hot sauce to the dipping sauce.
  • BBQ Burger Bombs: Substitute the ketchup and Dijon mustard in the beef mixture with your favorite BBQ sauce for a smoky flavor twist.
  • Cheese-Stuffed Burger Bombs: Instead of mixing the cheese in with the beef, place a small cube of cheese in the center of each burger bomb for a melty, cheesy surprise when bitten into.
  • Bacon Cheeseburger Bombs: Add your favorite cheese and bacon for this classic family favorite.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Burger Bombs

These burger bombs recipe is broken into 3 components:

  • Prepare the rolls
  • Make the burger bites and cook
  • Make the sauce and serve

Ensure that the dough has been thawed and allowed to rise halfway. Flatten and stretch it into a wide circle for filling.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Prepare the rolls. Place the rolls on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and lightly cover them with a towel. Let them thaw and rise until they have expanded by about half.

STEP 2: Cook beef. Sauté the beef, onions, and garlic in a large skillet over medium heat until the meat is no longer pink. Drain fat. Season with steak seasoning and Worcestershire sauce for added flavor. (Images 1-2)

Steps 1-4 of how to make burger bombs.

STEP 3: Mix the other ingredients. Combine cheese cube, cream cheese, crisp bacon, chopped pickles, ketchup, and Dijon mustard together. (Images 3-4)

STEP 4: Fill the rolls. Take one roll at a time and gently flatten it into a round circle. Next, generously spoon a tablespoon of the savory meat filling onto the center. Carefully fold and seal the sides of the roll, ensuring a secure closure. Shape the roll into a perfect round ball. (Images 5-6)

Steps 5-8 of how to make burger bombs.

STEP 5: Egg wash the rolls. Arrange the rolls on the baking pan and continue until all rolls are filled. Gently brush the rolls with the beaten egg and a sprinkle of water, then generously sprinkle sesame seeds on top. (Image 7)

STEP 6: Leave the dough to rise. Let the dough rise for a duration of 15 minutes. (Image 8)

STEP 7: Cook the rolls. Preheat the oven to 375 degrees. Allow the rolls to bake for approximately 20 minutes until they turn a golden brown color.

Baked burger bombs on cookie sheet.

STEP 8: Make the sauce. While the rolls are in the oven, mix the sauce ingredients together in a medium bowl and stir thoroughly to combine.

STEP 9: Cool the rolls and serve. Allow the rolls to cool for 5 minutes, then serve alongside the dipping sauce.

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Keep an eye on the rolls in the oven to prevent over-browning. If they start to get too dark, you can cover them with a sheet of aluminum foil for the rest of the baking time.
  • Make sure to seal the rolls properly so the filling doesn’t leak out during baking. Spend a little extra time ensuring each roll is completely closed.
  • Feel free to experiment with different kinds of cheese, seasonings, and sauces for the filling to create your own unique version of these tasty burger bombs.
  • These burger bombs can be made ahead of time and kept in the refrigerator until you’re ready to bake them. 
  • If you prefer a crunchier exterior, sprinkle the tops of the rolls with sesame seeds or poppy seeds before baking.
  • It’s important to let the rolls cool down slightly before serving, as the filling will be very hot. To maintain their warmth while cooling, cover them with a clean kitchen cloth.
Baked burger bombs with sesame seeds.

📋 Recipe FAQs

Can I use ground turkey instead of beef for the Burger Bombs?

Absolutely! Ground turkey can be a leaner alternative to beef. Keep in mind, however, that turkey might provide a slightly different flavor and texture.

Can I prepare the filling for the Burger Bombs the night before?

Yes, preparing the filling in advance can save you time. Simply store the filling in the refrigerator overnight in an airtight container. When you’re ready to make your Burger Bombs, take the filling out of the fridge and let it come to room temperature before using.

How can I make this recipe vegetarian?

To make this recipe vegetarian, substitute the beef with a plant-based meat alternative. You can also use a mixture of cooked, finely chopped vegetables like mushrooms, bell peppers, and onions.

How do I store leftover dipping sauce?

Leftover dipping sauce can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to a week. Be sure to stir the sauce before using it again.

🍽 What to Serve with Burger Bombs

Burger Bombs make for a delightful and filling dish on their own, but they also pair wonderfully with various side dishes to complete your meal. 

  • Crisp Salad: A refreshing green salad with a tangy vinaigrette can balance the richness of the burger bombs. 
  • Potato Wedges or Fries: Classic pairings like crispy oven-baked fries or seasoned potato wedges complement the burger bombs perfectly.
  • Coleslaw: The creaminess and crunch of a good coleslaw can offer an interesting textural contrast.
  • Grilled Vegetables: Grilled vegetables brushed with a light seasoning can be a hearty and healthy companion to this dish.
  • Pickles: Extra pickles can add a tangy crunch that cuts through the richness of the meat and cheese.
Burger bomb with a bite taken out.

❄️ Storage

Burger Bombs are perfect for storing and enjoying later! If you have leftovers, ensure they are cooled completely, then store them in an airtight container. They can be kept in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

To reheat, simply place them in a preheated oven at 350°F until warmed through. 

As for freezing, Burger Bombs freeze beautifully. Once cooled, place them on a baking sheet and freeze until solid. Once frozen, transfer them to a freezer-safe bag or container. They can be stored in the freezer for up to 3 months. When ready to enjoy, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator and reheat in your oven at 350°F. Remember, they may require a few extra minutes of heating time from frozen.

🥩 More Ground Beef Recipes You’ll Love

Still have some ground beef left to use? You’ll love this incredible list of ground beef dinner ideas.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Burget bomb with a bite taken out of it.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Burger Bombs with Dipping Sauce

How about a fun way to enjoy cheeseburgers instead of the traditional sandwich? These Burger bombs are packed full of flavor and dipped in a delicious sauce!
Course Appetizer, Dinner
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 20 burger bombs
Calories 260kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

Ingredients:

  • 20 frozen dinner roll dough thawed
  • 1 pound ground beef
  • ½ cup onion chopped
  • 1 teaspoon minced garlic
  • 1 tablespoon steak seasoning or seasoning salt
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 cup cheddar cheese shredded
  • 2 ounces cream cheese softened
  • 4 tablespoons chopped cooked bacon
  • ¼ cup dill pickles chopped
  • ¼ cup ketchup
  • 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 egg beaten with 1 teaspoon cold water
  • 2 tablespoons sesame seeds

Sauce:

  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • 1 teaspoon mustard
  • 2 teaspoons ketchup
  • 1 teaspoon worcestershire sauce
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 tablespoon sweet pickle relish

Instructions

  • Lay the rolls on a parchment lined pan and cover lightly with a towel. Allow to thaw and rise about halfway.
  • Cook the beef, onions and garlic in a pan over medium-high heat until the meat is no longer pink. Season with steak seasoning and Worcestershire sauce.
  • Add the cheese, cream cheese, bacon, chopped pickles, ketchup and Dijon mustard.
  • Flatten the rolls one at a time into round circles and place a heaping tablespoon of the meat filling in the middle. Pinch the sides of the rolls up in the middle and seal well. Make sure they are shaped into a round ball.
  • Place the rolls on the pan and repeat until all the rolls are filled. Brush the rolls with the beaten egg and water. Sprinkle with sesame seeds.
  • Allow to rise for 15 minutes.
  • Heat the oven to 375°. Bake the rolls for 20 minutes until golden brown.
  • While the rolls are baking combine the sauce ingredients together in a bowl and stir well.
  • Let the rolls cool for 5 minutes, then serve with the dipping sauce and enjoy.

Nutrition

Serving: 1burger bomb | Calories: 260kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 784mg | Potassium: 171mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 143IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 137mg | Iron: 2mg

Pumpkin Patch Brownies with Strawberry Pumpkins

Pumpkin Patch Brownies with Strawberry Pumpkins: Fudgy chocolate brownies, creamy Nutella frosting, crushed Oreo dirt, and the most adorable chocolate-covered strawberry pumpkins create a pumpkin patch dessert for your Halloween and Fall get-togethers!

Oh, I love this time of year! My brain is overflowing with Fall and Halloween food ideas. I can’t wait to break out a big bowl of Halloween snack mix, stir up a batch of Pumpkin Fluff Dip and dig in to this Pumpkin Poke Cake! But first, let’s talk brownies!

A pan of frosted brownies are topped with strawberries dipped in orange chocolate to look like pumpkins

Why You’ll Love This Pumpkin Patch Recipe

  • All the chocolate! Our pumpkin batch brownies start with a fudgy brownie base (made from a boxed brownie mix), get a layer of chocolate hazelnut frosting, a layer of rich dark Oreo crumbs, and finally, a dozen chocolate-covered strawberries. YUM!
  • Kid friendly! These brownies would be a fun Fall activity for a homeschool co-op day or play date. From spreading the frosting to dipping the strawberries, there are tons of ways kids can have so much fun and help make these Halloween treats.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Ingredients

Get the full recipe card with the instructions below!

The brownies:

  • One box of brownie mix (for a 9×13 pan) + the ingredients required per the package directions

Strawberry pumpkins:

  • 16 oz. strawberries
  • 12 oz. package of orange candy melts

The frosting:

  • 2 sticks of unsalted butter, softened
  • 1 cup Nutella
  • 2 cups powdered sugar
  • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
  • ⅛ teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons heavy whipping cream

For the Oreo crumb dirt topping

  • 15 Oreo chocolate sandwich cookies, crushed

Pumpkin patch vines and leaves

  • 1 package of fresh mint leaves
The ingredients to make pumpkin patch brownies with strawberry pumpkins are displayed on a white background

Instructions for the Pumpkin Patch Brownies

  1. Preheat the oven according to the package directions on the box of brownie mix and prepare a 9×13 baking pan with non-stick cooking spray.
  2. In a large bowl, prepare the brownie mix according to the package directions.
  3. Pour the batter into the prepared baking pan and spread it evenly. Bake the brownies as per the instructions and allow the pan of brownies to cool completely before frosting and decorating.
A simple photo with a pan of brownie batter spread in a white 9 inch by 13 inch baking dish
Brownie batter
A 9 inch by 13 inch baking dish with fudgy chocolate baked brownies
Allow brownies to cool

How to Make the Strawberry Pumpkins

  1. Wash and dry the strawberries completely. Then, line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Place the orange candy melts in a microwave safe bowl and microwave them according to package instructions until the candy melts are smooth and creamy. Be careful not to overheat the candy melts as they can scorch and become thick.
  3. Holding the leaves of each strawberry, dip each berry in the melted chocolate and place it on the parchment lined pan. Leave the strawberries at room temperature to allow the chocolate to harden. The candy melts do harden relatively fast, so try to work quickly. You only need to dip one strawberry for each brownie, so I normally make 12 -15 strawberry pumpkins for a 9×13 pan of pumpkin patch brownies.
A plate of strawberries sits next to a baking dish prepared with parchment paper and a small bowl of smooth orange candy melts for dipping
Prepare strawberries for dipping
A plate of strawberries are waiting to be dipped in orange chocolate melts
Dip strawberries
  1. Pour the leftover chocolate in a piping bag with a Wilson #4 tip inserted. If you don’t have a piping bag, you can use a small resealable food storage bag and snip off a small piece of the corner of the bag to use to pipe the lines on the strawberry pumpkins.
  2. Squeeze the chocolate slowly to the tip or corner of the bag and pipe small vertical lines around each strawberry to make the pumpkin ‘ridges’. Return the strawberries to the parchment lined tray to fully set.
A hand holds a piping bag fitting with a small piping tip filled with melted orange chocolate
Piping bag
Close up photo of a orange chocolate covered strawberries are being piped to look like pumpkins
Pipe lines

Instructions for the Nutella frosting

  1. Place the Nutella in a microwave-safe bowl for about 15 seconds and stir. The Nutella will not be fully melted, just softened a bit. If it seems hot, allow it to cool slightly or it will melt the butter.
  2. In a large mixing bowl, cream the butter until it is smooth and fluffy. Add the Nutella and mix it until it is incorporated with the butter. Add the powdered sugar gradually and mix until combined.
  3. Add vanilla extract, salt and the heavy whipping cream and mix until combined. Set the frosting aside.
A hand is holding a teaspoon of vanilla extract and is ready to add it to a bowl with the ingredients to make homemade Nutella buttercream
Make the frosting
A bowl of creamy fluffy light brown homemade Nutella buttercream frosting
Homemade Nutella buttercream

For the Oreo “dirt” topping:

  1. Place the Oreo cookies into a food processor and pulse until you have crumbs. If you don’t have a food processor, place the cookies into a large zip top bag and use a rolling pin to crush the cookies into crumbs. Place the Oreo dirt into a bowl and set it aside.

Assemble the Pumpkin Patch Brownies

  1. Frost the pan of brownies with the Nutella buttercream. (Stir frosting to bring it to spreading consistency if necessary.)
  2. Sprinkle the top of the brownies with the crushed Oreo dirt. Make sure to get an even layer of crumbs on top of the frosting.
A pan of brownies is being frosted with fluffy Nutella frosting
Frost the brownies
A frosted pan of brownies is being sprinkled with crushed Oreos to make the patch for Pumpkin Patch Brownies
Add the Oreo dirt
  1. Arrange the strawberry pumpkins on top of the dessert.
  2. Place fresh mint sprigs between the strawberries to make the vines and leaves in the pumpkin patch.
A hand is placing a chocolate covered strawberry on a pan of pumpkin patch brownies
Add strawberry pumpkins
A hand is placing sprigs of fresh mint on a pan of pumpkin patch brownies with Oreo dirt and chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins
Add mint leaves

How cute are these brownies?! Those strawberry pumpkins are just my favorite thing. You could even sprinkle these sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds on top!

pumpkin patch brownies in a white baking dish

To serve the brownies, cut them into squares and place a strawberry pumpkin in the center of each brownie. You can even sprinkle a little bit of the Oreo dirt on each plate.

It would also be super fun to serve a slice of these brownies with these Nutter Butter Mummies!

I’m pretty sure this easy dessert with become a Fall staple around your home! Honestly, brownies topped with chocolate-covered strawberries may be the only way I serve brownies from here on out.

A fudgy brownie is topped with a chocolate covered strawberry pumpkin and accompanied by a silver fork on a white dessert plate.

Substitutions

We think these pumpkin patch brownies should show up at all of your fun Fall festivities, so we have some suggested substitutions below that might fit your family and lifestyle.

  • Brownies: We love the time-saving step of using a box brownie mix but you can really save time with pre-made brownies from your local bakery or grocery store. If you have the time or just prefer a from-scratch recipe, bake up a pan of homemade brownies. (Check out our brownie recipes for inspiration!)
  • Bake a Cake: If your family prefers, you can bake a chocolate cake as the base of this cute Halloween dessert.
  • Frosting: While this dreamy Nutella frosting is pretty scrumptious, you can easily use store-bought frosting for these brownies. Pro tip: whip a tub of store-bought frosting with a stand mixer or hand mixer for a lighter, fluffier consistency!

Variations

We have several ways to customize this fun dessert for your family!

  • Feel free to switch up the flavors of the frosting to complement the brownies. Try caramel buttercream, peanut butter frosting, chocolate butter cream or this fan favorite, Oreo buttercream! You can also use your favorite flavor of Oreo cookies. We prefer the dark chocolate cookies to make the Oreo dirt, but you can use the golden Oreos if that is what you can find.
  • Instead of fresh mint, use green frosting (tint vanilla frosting with green food coloring) or green icing to pipe small green lines for vines and leaves for the pumpkin patch.
  • Using paper and toothpicks or skewers, make pumpkin patch signs to place in the pan of brownies or in each individual brownie. You could also make little signs with your guests’ names at a Halloween party.
  • Make these into fun Halloween brownies by piping on jack-o-lantern faces or adding spooky candy eyes to the chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins.
  • Decorate the top of these brownies with pumpkin candies or candy corn.
Brownies topped with chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins are plated on white plates surrounded by fresh mint and a bowl full of bright red strawberries

How to Store These Pumpkin Patch Brownies

You can store the brownies in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. (The Oreo crumbs may soften, but they will still taste great.) I recommend storing the strawberries for 1-2 days in a separate container lined with a paper towel to collect any condensation.

I would not recommend storing the brownies in the freezer.

A close up of a pan of pumpkin patch brownies with crushed Oreo dirt and a patch of orange chocolate covered strawberries that look like pumpkin

Top Tip

While you can make the brownies and frosting ahead of time, for the best results, we recommend that you make the Oreo dirt crumbs, the strawberry pumpkins and assemble the brownies on the day you are going to serve them.

More Recipes You’ll Love

If you’re a fan of chocolate covered strawberries, you’ll love seeing how we made these pink chocolate covered strawberries!

Or, if you’re an Oreo fan as much as we are, then this Oreo dessert is going to be a new favorite!

Tis the season… if you’re in to pumpkin “everything” then also make sure to check out this delicious pumpkin cheesecake bar recipe and a similar pumpkin cheesecake bites recipe!

Or of course, this easy pumpkin pie is a great choice to make for the holidays, too!

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

A pan of frosted brownies are topped with strawberries dipped in orange chocolate to look like pumpkins
Print Pin
5 from 5 votes

Pumpkin Patch Brownies with Strawberry Pumpkins

Fudgy chocolate brownies, creamy Nutella frosting, crushed Oreo dirt and the most adorable chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins create a pumpkin patch dessert!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 14 minutes
Cook Time 23 minutes
Total Time 37 minutes
Servings 12 brownies
Calories 689kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

Brownies

  • 1 box brownie mix plus ingredients required on the package

Chocolate covered strawberry pumpkins

  • 16 oz strawberries
  • 12 oz orange candy melts

Frosting

  • 2 sticks unsalted butter softened
  • 1 cup Nutella®
  • 2 cups powdered sugar
  • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
  • ⅛ teaspoon salt
  • 2 tbs heavy whipping cream

Oreo crumb dirt topping

  • 15 Oreos crushed

Pumpkin patch leaves & vines

  • 1 package Mint leaves

Instructions

To make the brownies

  • Preheat the oven according to the package directions on the box of brownies and prepare a 9×13 baking pan with non-stick cooking spray.
  • In a large bowl, prepare the brownie mix according to the package directions.
  • Pour batter into the prepared baking pan and spread it evenly. Bake brownies as per the instructions and allow the pan of brownie to cool completely before frosting and decorating.

Make strawberry pumpkins

  • Wash and dry the strawberries completely. Then, line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the orange candy melts in a microwave safe bowl and microwave them according to package instructions until the candy melts are smooth and creamy.
  • Holding the leaves of each strawberry, dip each berry in the melted chocolate and place it on the parchment lined pan. Leave the strawberries at room temperature to allow the chocolate to harden.
  • Pour the leftover chocolate in a piping bag with a #4 Wilson tip inserted. (See notes if you don't have a piping bag.)
  • Squeeze the chocolate slowly to the piping tip and pipe small vertical lines around each strawberry to make the pumpkin 'ridges'. Return the strawberries to the parchment lined tray to full set.

Instructions for the Nutella frosting

  • Place the Nutella in a microwave safe bowl for about 15 seconds and stir. The Nutella will not be fully melted, just softened a bit. It is seems hot, allow it cool slightly or it will melt the butter.
  • In a large mixing bowl, cream the butter until it is smooth and fluffy. Add the Nutella and mix it until it is incorporated with the butter. Add the powdered sugar gradually and mix to combine.
  • Add vanilla extract, salt and heavy whipping cream and mix until combined. Set the frosting aside.

Assemble the Pumpkin Patch brownies

  • Frost the pan of brownies with the Nutella buttercream.
  • Sprinkle the top of the brownies with the crushed Oreo dirt. Make sure to get an even layer of crumbs on top of the frosting.
  • Arrange the strawberry pumpkins on top of the Oreo dirt.
  • Place fresh mint springs between the strawberries to make the vines and leaves in the pumpkin patch.

Notes

  • If you prefer, you can make these brownies in an 9×9 or 8×8 square pan, just adjust the baking time accordingly.
  • Be careful not to overheat the candy melt as they can scorch/burn and become thick.
  • The candy melts do harden relatively quickly, so try to work quickly.
  • You only need to dip one strawberry for each brownie, so I normally make 12-15 strawberry pumpkins for a 9×13 pan of pumpkin patch brownies.
  • If you don’t have a piping bag, you can pour the chocolate into a small resealable food-storage bag (small ziploc bag) and snip off a tiny corner of the bag to use to pipe the lines on the strawberry pumpkins.

Nutrition

Serving: 1brownie | Calories: 689kcal | Carbohydrates: 90g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 233mg | Potassium: 203mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 70g | Vitamin A: 517IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 4mg

S’mores Dip

S’mores Dip is a delicious way to enjoy a campfire dessert for a crowd! No crowding around a fire, building a snack. Simply dip a graham cracker in to this melty chocolate and toasted large marshmallows, getting all your favorite flavors of this chocolatey dip for a delicious dessert recipe.

For the fall, we think you’ll also love this pumpkin fluff and these cast iron brownies!

Post originally created in July 2021, recipe updated in September 2023.

S'mores dip in cast iron pan.

This easy recipe is one of our favorite dessert dips for the cooler months, when entertaining but is also amazing as just a fun snack idea with the kids during a football game or movie nights. This hot chocolate dip is also another fun, no-bake dessert in the cooler months.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Only 2 ingredients: Melted Hershey Bars and gooey marshmallows, are all that’s required for this recipe and then you can choose to dip whatever you prefer in it! Graham crackers are the obvious choice but you can also use other items such as vanilla wafers or even fresh fruit. However, there are more ideas below of what you can serve with this delicious dip.
  • Ready in under 30 minutes: This classic campfire treat is made in the oven and is ready to enjoy in under 30 minutes!

🧾 Ingredients Needed

You don’t need a lot for this easy treat. See what we used below and other additional ideas for dipping or substitutions.

Ingredients on marble counter for smores dip.
  • Marshmallows – Although we always use large marshmallows, using regular marshmallows mini marshmallows, or even marshmallow fluff may work just as well.
  • Hershey Bars – Using regular Hershey candy bars for this recipe is preferred but you may also choose to use mini Hershey bars, milk chocolate chips, or maybe even something fun like Reese’s Cups. You may even prefer to use dark chocolate or semi-sweet chocolate chips.

🍳 Equipment

A cast iron skillet is recommended for this so it can bake in the oven nicely but you may also try a baking dish or pie plate if you don’t have a cast-iron skillet.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Smores Dip

It’s recommended to make this right when you’re ready to enjoy it, as the marshmallows could get hard and the chocolate could harden.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Preheat the oven to 450 degrees and prepare a large cast iron skillet with non-stick cooking spray.  

Steps 1-4 of how to make smores dip.

STEP 1. Add chocolate. Break the Hershey bars along the indentions and add to the bottom of the skillet, spreading evenly. 

STEPS 2 & 3. Add marshmallows. Top with the marshmallows by placing in a single layer, and place them side by side all facing the same direction. 

STEP 4. Cook skillet for 12 – 14 minutes or until the tops of the marshmallows are golden brown. 

When done, remove from heat and dip graham crackers into the dip immediately to serve.

Hand dipping graham cracker in to smores dip.

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Arranging the marshmallows. The marshmallows should be flush against one another with little wiggle room. However, they shouldn’t be so packed that it makes some mallows stuck up from the pressure when they become toasted marshmallows.
  • Better presentation. For the dip to look even better, stand all of the marshmallows up on their ends, instead of placing them on their sides or in different directions.
Smores dip in cast iron pan.

📋 Recipe FAQs

What can I use instead of graham crackers for Smores?

Fresh fruits, cookies, and sweet crackers are great options for dipping, instead of graham crackers.

What goes good with s’mores?

You can also add fun items to s’mores like peanut butter, chocolate syrup, or even pumpkin pie filling.

🍽 What to Serve with S’mores Dip

Graham crackers are the most popular to serve with this favorite campfire treat. However, here are some other suggestions that we think you’ll love serving with this delicious s’mores dip.

  • Oreo cookies
  • graham cracker sticks
  • peanut butter cookies
  • fresh strawberries
  • potato chips (Yes! The salty and sweet contrast can be great!)

❄️ Storage

If you have leftover smores dip, it will be best to store it in an airtight container although it may be easier to leave in the baking dish so it can be reheated easily.

🍫 More S’mores Recipes You’ll Love

Skip the fire pit this year and make more Smores recipes with our favorite below, or at least recipes that are similar, like that delicious Booty Dip (or cannoli dip).

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

S'mores Dip in cast iron pan.
Print Pin
5 from 5 votes

S’mores Dip

Making smores dip is easy and great for a crowd, using Hershey candy bars and large marshmallows, and baking it in the oven.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 22 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 250kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 12 1.55 ounce Hershey Candy Bars broken in to small pieces
  • 1 pound marshmallows original size (not mini and not jumbo)
  • graham crackers for garnishing

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 450 degrees and prepare a large cast iron skillet with non-stick cooking spray. 
  • Break the Hershey bars along the indentions and add to the bottom of the skillet, spreading evenly. 
  • Top with Marshmallows, placed side by side all facing the same direction. Cook skillet for 12 – 14 minutes or until the tops of the marshmallows are golden brown. 
  • When done, remove from heat and dip graham crackers into the dip immediately to serve. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 63g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 0.5mg | Sodium: 62mg | Potassium: 4mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 45g | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 0.2mg

Easy Sausage Pasta Bake

The Easy Sausage Pasta Bake is not just an easy meal. The pasta is coated in a marinara sauce, surrounded by flavorful sausage, and topped off with a generous sprinkle of mozzarella cheese for a delicious flavor combination. 

As with our other pasta recipes, this one is comfort food at its best, promising a burst of flavors with each bite. (You’re also going to love this Blackened Chicken Alfredo!)

What makes this dish even more irresistible is its simplicity and speed – you’ll have this hearty dish and crowd-pleasing dinner on the table in no time.

Baked sausage pasta bake in white baking dish.

Still, have some sausages to use? First, check out my tips on How to Cook Sausages in the Oven and find new ways to enjoy them. Then you could try Sausage and Egg Casserole for a weekend brunch.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Easy to make: By using a good quality sauce, this becomes a very simple recipe to make.
  • Big batch meal: You can easily double the ingredients to make a big batch if you have lots of mouths to feed!
  • Ready in only 45 minutes: This recipe, from start to finish, only takes 45 minutes so you don’t need to start cooking long before you need to serve it.

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for sausage pasta bake.
  • Sausage – We use the mild Jimmy Dean’s sausages for this recipe as the kids love them and they aren’t too strongly flavored.
  • Sauce – Prego Three Cheese Sauce is our go-to option for this recipe but you can use any spaghetti sauce you like.
  • Pasta – Spiral pasta works well for this recipe as the sauce sticks to it nicely and it is less messy than something like spaghetti! Rigatoni pasta is another great choice.

📖 Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Sausage – You can use a hot Italian sausage or even something like a turkey sausage in this recipe depending on what everyone enjoys.
  • Pasta – Swap the spirals for any other type of pasta that holds sauce well so something like penne would work perfectly if that’s what you have handy.

📖 Variations

Here are a few easy variations you can try:

  • Vegetable Boost: Add a handful of your favorite vegetables to the mix. Bell peppers, zucchini, or even spinach could offer a welcome crunch and added nutritional value.
  • Cheese Variety: While mozzarella is a classic choice, feel free to experiment with different cheeses. A blend of parmesan and cheddar, for instance, could add a new depth of flavor.
  • Meat Alternatives: If you want to go meatless, replace the sausages with a plant-based substitute or add in some hearty mushrooms.
  • Spice it Up: For those who enjoy a bit of heat, consider adding some crushed red pepper flakes, chili flakes, or a dash of cayenne to the sauce.
  • Seafood Variant: Swap the sausages for shrimp or scallops for a delicious seafood twist. Remember to adjust cooking times accordingly! 

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make Easy Sausage Pasta Bake

This sausage pasta bake is broken into 2 components:

  • prepare the ingredients
  • bake everything together

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Heat the oven. Preheat the oven to 350°.

STEP 2: Cook the sausage. In a skillet, crumble the sausage into clumps and sauté with onion until the cooked sausage is browned and the onion is tender. When halfway through cooking, incorporate garlic and continue cooking for an additional 2 minutes. Remove any excess grease by draining. (Image 1)

Steps 1-4 of how to make sausage pasta bake.

STEP 3: Make the sauce. In a spacious pot, combine spaghetti sauce with basil, oregano, parsley, salt, and sugar. Allow the mixture to simmer gently for approximately 20 minutes, ensuring to stir occasionally. (Images 2 & 3)

STEP 4: Cook pasta. Prepare spiral pasta as per the instructions provided. (Image 4)

Steps 5-8 on how to make a sausage pasta bake.

STEP 5: Combine and add to the oven. Combine the sausage, onion, garlic cloves, and spiral pasta with the spaghetti sauce, ensuring they are well-mixed. Transfer the mixture to a large baking dish and sprinkle the top generously with mozzarella cheese. (Images 5 – 8)

STEP 6: Cook and serve. Bake until the cheese is perfectly melted and golden brown, creating a delightful and gooey texture.

Serving of sausage pasta bake on white plate.

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Choosing the right sausage: For the best flavor, consider using a high-quality sausage. It’ll add significant depth to the dish. 
  • Pasta cooking tip: Cook the pasta until it’s just under al dente. Remember, it will continue to cook in the oven, which will prevent it from becoming too soft.
  • Cheese selection: While we recommend using mozzarella, feel free to experiment with other cheeses like sharp cheddar or even gruyere for a more unique flavor.
  • Baking dish: Choose a deep baking dish to accommodate all the ingredients and prevent the sauce from bubbling over.
Fork holding a bite of sausage pasta bake.

📋 Recipe FAQs

Do you boil pasta before pasta bake?

Yes, you should boil the pasta before incorporating it into the pasta bake. However, it’s crucial to only cook the pasta until it’s just under al dente, as it will continue to cook in the oven. This helps to prevent the pasta from becoming overly soft and losing texture after baking.

Can you prepare this pasta bake in advance?

Absolutely! This recipe can be prepared up to the point of baking and refrigerated overnight. Just be sure to allow extra baking time because the pasta bake will be starting from a chilled state.

Can I use a different type of meat?

Yes, this recipe is very versatile and can work with various types of meat. You can substitute the sausage with ground beef, chicken, or turkey. Remember to adjust the cooking times accordingly.

I’m vegetarian. What can I use instead of sausage?

For those following a vegetarian diet, you can replace the sausage with a plant-based substitute or use a variety of vegetables like bell peppers, zucchini, mushrooms, or eggplants for added heartiness.

What if I don’t have all the herbs listed?

While the combination of basil, oregano, and parsley creates a flavorful pasta sauce, you can adapt to what you have available. Italian seasoning is a great substitute that combines several herbs in one.

🍽 What to Serve with Sausage Pasta Bake

The Easy Sausage Pasta Bake is a hearty meal in itself, but a few complementary sides can elevate your dining experience even further. A simple, fresh green side salad with a tangy vinaigrette can cut through the richness of the pasta, providing a refreshing contrast. 

For a cozy, comforting meal, serve with a side of garlic bread or plain crusty bread to mop up any delicious tomato sauce. Alternatively, a steamed vegetable medley or roasted Brussels sprouts can add some nutritional value and color to the dish. 

❄️ Storage

Leftovers of the Easy Sausage Pasta Bake can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Make sure to cool it completely before transferring it to an airtight container. When ready to serve, reheat in the microwave or in the oven at 350° until warmed through. You may even want to try making fried spaghetti out of the leftovers!

As for freezing, yes, this pasta bake is freezer-friendly! Prepare the pasta bake as directed, but hold off on baking. Allow it to cool completely, then cover it tightly with both plastic wrap and aluminum foil or transfer it to a large freezer bag and press out as much air as possible before sealing. You can store it in the freezer for up to 2 months. 

When ready to eat, thaw overnight in the refrigerator, then bake as directed. Note that the texture of the pasta might be a bit softer after freezing but the flavors will still be delicious.

🍝 More Pasta Recipes You’ll Love

We love pasta because there are so many ways to cook and serve it. One easy weeknight meal is the Instant Pot Cajun Pasta which is full of flavor but also easy to cook if you have an Instant Pot. Or if time is short, try this 30-Minute Taco Pasta Recipe as a great option that has loads of taste without tons of work.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Sausage pasta bake in white baking dish.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Easy Sausage Pasta Bake

The Easy Sausage Pasta Bake is a simple and delicious option for a main meal for the whole family, that uses simple ingredients.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Italian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 612kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 16 oz Jimmy Deans sausage mild
  • 1 small onion chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 lb spiral pasta
  • 2 jars 24oz spaghetti sauce (I like to use Prego Three Cheese)
  • 1 ½ teaspoon dried basil
  • 1 ½ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ tablespoon parsley
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 4 teaspoon sugar
  • ½ cup mozzarella cheese optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350°.
  • Cook spiral pasta according to direction.
  • In a skillet, break up the sausage into clumps and onion until the sausage is browned and the onion is soft.
  • Halfway through cooking, add in garlic and cook for an additional 2 minutes.
  • Drain.
  • In a large pot, add spaghetti sauce, basil, oregano, parsley, salt, and sugar, and let it simmer for about 20 minutes. Stir in between.
  • Transfer the sausage together with onion and garlic and spiral pasta into the spaghetti sauce and combine well.
  • Pour into a 13×9 casserole dish. Sprinkle mozzarella cheese on top.
  • Put in the oven until the cheese is melted.

Notes

Tips:
You can choose to substitute mild sausage for hot sausage or turkey sausage.
Can you make this pasta in advance?
Yes! This can be prepared up to the point of baking and then be refrigerated overnight. Just be sure to allow extra baking time because the pasta bake will be starting from a chilled state.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 612kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 65mg | Sodium: 813mg | Potassium: 414mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 103IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 2mg

Oreo Mug Cake

Oreo Mug Cake: Did you know that you can make an Oreo mug cake using 2 simple ingredients? That’s right. This simple 2-ingredient Oreo mug cake recipe is going to be your new favorite go-to late-night snack and trust us, this single-serving dessert recipe is the best easy mug cake recipe out there!

With this vanilla mug cake recipe being so popular, we knew that this other mug cake would be something you’d love too when we added it to our other cake recipes. If you love desserts for two, then you’ll also want to check out this mini chocolate cake recipe too!

Oreo mug cake with a spoon.

I am a huge fan of Oreo recipes, and the easier the better! Before I put together this delicious Oreo mug cake recipe, my late-night Oreo dessert go-tos were this Oreo dip (perfect for dipping even more Oreo cookies in) and these Oreo brookies. I highly recommend checking out the Oreo brookies if you have a nightly sweet tooth!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 2 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • One mug recipe: Simply throw everything together in your favorite microwave-safe mug and you’re set for this late-night treat!
  • Ready in only 90 seconds: Talk about a quick and easy way to have an after-dinner dessert! Ready in seconds is my kind of favorite dessert recipe.

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Carton of milk sitting next to a package of Oreos.
  • Oreo Cookies – We used regular Oreos for this recipe, but you could easily change it up with Golden Oreos or seasonally flavored Oreos like Pumpkin Spice.
  • Milk – We used whole milk for this recipe, but you could easily switch it out for your preferred milk. Please note that using non-dairy milk might change the consistency of the Oreo mug cake.

📖 Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Oreos – As I mentioned above, playing around with different types of Oreos could easily change up this recipe.
  • Milk – Change up this recipe by using your favorite milk, such as almond milk or soy milk! Or add some extra creamy flavor by using half and half or whipping cream instead of milk.

📖 Variations

Something that makes this easy Oreo microwave mug cake recipe so awesome is that it can easily be doubled. Make yourself a bigger batch to share (or to keep for yourself) by doubling, adding to a larger mug, and then adding 30-second increments to the cooking time in the microwave.

Another alteration you can make would be adding a few extra ingredients to the mug cake, such as chocolate chips or a swirl of peanut butter! Although, for the sake of this recipe, you’ll get the best results by sticking to the how-to.

👩🏻‍🍳 How to Make 2 Ingredient Oreo Mug Cake

Making this simple 90-second Oreo mug cake recipe is as 1, 2, 3, 4!

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1. Crush the Oreos: Start by crushing your Oreos as small as you can.

Tip: Crush your Oreos in a large plastic bag with a rolling pin.

Steps 1-4 of how to make Oreo mug cake.

STEP 2. Add Ingredients to Your Mug: Dump the crushed Oreos and measured milk into your favorite microwave-safe mug. You can prepare the mug with some non-stick cooking spray, but it is not necessary.

STEP 3. Stir: After both ingredients are in the mug, stir well.

STEP 4. Microwave: Finally, microwave for roughly 90 seconds.

Cooked Oreo mug cake with spoon lifting out a bite.

Finish off the recipe by adding your favorite toppings. We loved topping this Oreo mug cake with vanilla ice cream and caramel. They really enhanced the Oreo flavor and were a great idea.

Some other great topping ideas are:

  • chocolate syrup
  • melted peanut butter
  • marshmallow fluff
  • whipped cream and sprinkles
  • chocolate chips
  • Or whip up the frosting recipe in this chocolate war cake, for an over-the-top topping!
Oreo mug cake with spoon lifting out whipped cream and caramel sauce.

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • Eat while warm. Let the mug cake cool slightly after microwaving, but enjoy it warm for the best flavor and texture
  • Make sure to top it. While this recipe is super tasty on its own, it’s made even better with some simple toppings like ice cream or whipped cream!

📋 Recipe FAQs

How to tell when the mug cake is done?

Your mug cake is ready to eat when you’re able to lightly poke the top of the cake and it bounces back, just like a cupcake. If it doesn’t bounce back, add some more time in the microwave.

Can I make this Oreo mug cake with any cookies?

We suggest sticking with Oreos for this Oreo mug cake recipe, but attempting the recipe with other cream-filled cookie options might yield the same results!

Can you double this Oreo mug cake recipe?

Easily! You can definitely double this Oreo mug cake recipe for a bigger mug cake. We suggest adding 30-60 more seconds in the microwave if you decide to double the recipe. Use the tip above to find out if the doubled recipe is done after that time in the microwave.

How can I make an Oreo mug cake without baking powder?

Easily make an Oreo mug cake without baking powder with these two ingredients: crushed Oreos and milk!

🍽 What to Top Your Oreo Mug Cake With

There are so many creative topping options for your Oreo mug cake and I think that is the best part of this easy recipe! Here are a few tasty ideas that we love:

  • a scoop of ice cream and caramel/chocolate syrup
  • melted peanut butter
  • marshmallow fluff
  • whipped cream and sprinkles
  • chocolate chips

🍰 More Oreo Recipes You’ll Love

If you are a big Oreo fan, you are going to adore these delicious Oreo-centered recipes! – CHANGE TO OREO

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Oreo mug cake with a spoon dipped in.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Oreo Mug Cake

Classic Oreo cookie flavor meets super easy and delicious dessert idea with this 2 ingredient 90 second Oreo mug cake recipe!
Course Dessert, Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 2 minutes
Cook Time 2 minutes
Total Time 4 minutes
Servings 1 cake
Calories 250kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 4 Oreo cookies
  • 3 tablespoon Whole Milk

Instructions

  • Crush Oreos. Place the Oreos in a large plastic bag and use a rolling pin to crush them into tiny pieces.
  • Add to Mug. Add the Oreos and milk to a microwave safe mug.
  • Mix. Mix well.
  • Microwave. Microwave for about 90 seconds.
  • Serve. Let the mug cake cool slightly before topping with your favorite toppings and enjoy!

Notes

While this Oreo mug cake recipe is delicious as is, it can be made even better with flavored Oreos. Change it up by using Golden Oreos or your favorite Oreo flavor such as mint or chocolate!

Nutrition

Serving: 1cake | Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 5mg | Sodium: 203mg | Potassium: 180mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 74IU | Calcium: 65mg | Iron: 6mg

Subway Crab Sandwich Recipe

If you remember the crab meat Seafood Sensation Sandwich from Subway back in the day, you’ll love this copycat recipe!

Simple to replicate at home, this recipe provides a perfect alternative when you have a craving for the famous Subway sandwich. It’s definitely one of our easiest sandwich recipes and it’s perfect for a quick lunch idea too!

Copycat subway crab sandwich on white plate.

Inspired to try a few more crab recipes? You could try a simple Crab Salad as a tasty and simple light meal. Or combine crab with some pasta to make a Crab Pasta Bake for a heartier meal.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Make big batches: You can just increase the amount of crab meat you get to feed more people easily.
  • No cook recipe: No need to turn on the oven or the stovetop for this recipe as there’s no cooking involved.

What is Imitation Crab Meat?

Imitation crab meat, also known as “krab” or crab sticks, is a type of seafood made from starch and finely pulverized white fish (surimi) that’s been shaped and cured to resemble the leg meat of snow crab or Japanese spider crab. It’s a popular choice in seafood salads, sushi rolls, and now as a star ingredient in our delightful Subway Crab Sandwich. 

Despite its name, imitation crab meat doesn’t have crab in its composition, but it’s flavored to taste like crab, providing a cost-effective and readily available alternative to the real thing.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of simple ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the main ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Ingredients to make copycat Subway seafood sensation sandwich.
  • Crab meat – Choose a good quality imitation crab meat to get the best results from your sandwiches. We prefer using Crab Classic brand.
  • Bread – Choose your favorite Subway-style roll for the sandwich as any type will work well.
  • Cheese – Provolone cheese is a great option for this recipe to add a little creaminess.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Imitation Crab Meat: If you prefer using real crab meat, it’s a great option for a more authentic seafood flavor. For a vegetarian option, you could use finely chopped hearts of palm or artichoke hearts, which have similar textures and can absorb flavors well.
  • Provolone Cheese: If you’re not a fan of provolone, you can use any type of cheese that melts well. Cheddar and mozzarella both make great alternatives.
  • Bread: If you don’t have a Subway-style roll on hand, French or Italian bread works just as well if cut into the proper sandwich size. We use wheat sandwich bread often too for these BLTs with Avocado, in case you have some of that on hand.

Variations

  • Spicy Crab Sandwich: If you love a kick in your food, consider adding some sliced jalapeños or a dash of hot sauce. This tiny tweak can transform the sandwich into a fiery delight.
  • Crispy Crab Sandwich: Fancy a bit of crunch? Add some crispy lettuce or thinly sliced cucumber. This is a great way to bring freshness and a satisfying crunch that complements the softness of the crab meat and bread.
  • Avocado Crab Sandwich: For a creamy and healthy food twist, try adding some slices of ripe avocado. This will not only enhance the texture but also add a dose of healthy fats to your meal.

How to Make Subway Crab Sandwich

This copycat Subway crab sandwich is broken into 2 components:

  • Mix the crab meat
  • Put the sandwich together

Makes about 4 subs, depending on how much crab salad you put on each sandwich.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Mix the crab meat. Place the crab meat in a medium-sized bowl and delicately separate any pieces that may be stuck together. (Alternatively, you can shred the crab meat if desired, but larger pieces will resemble the Subway sandwich more closely, as opposed to shredded crab.) (Image 1)

STEP 2: Add the mayo and salt. Combine mayo and salt, stirring until thoroughly mixed. Here you can add an optional ingredient of black pepper if desired 

Steps 1-2 of how to make crab meat sandwich.

STEP 3: Make the sandwich. Place optional slices of cheese on the bread, then spoon generous spoonfuls of the seafood salad in equal portions onto the cheese for each sandwich. The quantity can be adjusted based on your preference for a hearty sandwich. (Image 2)

Copycat Seafood Sensation Sandwich from Subway.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • For a lighter option: Substitute mayonnaise for light mayonnaise or low-fat version of Greek yogurt. It’ll still give you the creaminess without all the calories. However this will alter the taste of the sandwich and it may taste different than the Subway version.
  • Quality matters: Although imitation crab meat is used, don’t skimp on the quality. High-quality imitation crab meat will result in a tastier sandwich.
  • Toasting the bread: For a toasty crunch, consider heating up your favorite bakery bread before assembling the sandwich. But remember, it’s not traditional Subway style to toast this particular sandwich.
  • Adding extra veggies: Feel free to add extra veggies on top of the crab salad, like lettuce, tomato, red onion, red pepper, green peppers, white onion slices or cucumber slices for added freshness and crunch. 

Recipe FAQs

Can I use real crab meat instead of imitation crab meat?

Yes, you absolutely can! Using real crab meat will give your sandwich a more authentic seafood flavor. Just make sure to properly cook and shred the crab meat before mixing it with the mayo and salt.

Can I make this sandwich vegetarian?

For a vegetarian version, you can skip the crab meat and use a combination of diced veggies or mushrooms sautéed with similar seasonings. Vegan seafood substitutes could also work.

How do I make this sandwich gluten-free?

To make this sandwich gluten-free, you just need to swap out the bread for a gluten-free option. Remember to check the labels of the other necessary ingredients to ensure they are also gluten-free.

Can I heat up the crab sandwich?

While the traditional Subway style is to serve this sandwich cold, you can choose to heat it up if you prefer. You can do this by toasting the bread before assembly or by grilling the sandwich after it’s been put together. Keep in mind that heating may change the texture of the ingredients.

What to Serve with Subway Crab Sandwich

These Subway Crab salad Sandwiches are incredibly versatile and can be paired with a variety of sides to make a balanced meal. Here are some suggestions:

  • Chips: A classic accompaniment for sandwiches. Choose from a variety of flavors to complement the taste of the crab sandwich. 
  • Salad: A fresh, side salad is a great, light side dish that pairs well with the richness of the sandwich. Opt for simple greens, a tangy slaw, or a hearty Caesar salad.
  • Soup: Especially on a chilly day, a warm bowl of soup is perfect alongside this sandwich. Try a classic tomato soup, a comforting chicken noodle, or a creamy mushroom soup.
  • Pickles: The tanginess of pickles makes them a perfect contrast to the creaminess of the crab sandwich, adding a bit of a crunch as well. 
  • Fruit: For a healthier option, consider serving a honey lime fruit salad or sliced fresh fruit on the side. The natural sweetness of the fruit pairs well with the savory crab meat.
  • Fries: Whether you prefer regular potato fries, air fried sweet potato fries, or even zucchini fries, they all make a tasty side dish for the sandwich.

Storage

Subway Crab Sandwiches are best enjoyed immediately after preparation to fully appreciate the freshness of the ingredients. However, if you need to store them:

  • Refrigeration: Assembled sandwiches can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Make sure to cover them tightly with plastic wrap or place them in an airtight container to prevent the bread from drying out. It’s best to add any crispy vegetables you like just before eating to maintain their crunch.
  • Freezing: While the crab salad itself can be frozen for up to a month, we don’t recommend freezing the assembled sandwiches. The freezing and thawing process can alter the texture of the bread and fresh ingredients. To freeze the crab salad, place it in a sealed container, leaving a bit of space for expansion. When you’re ready to enjoy your sandwich, thaw the crab salad in the refrigerator overnight and assemble your sandwich the next day.

More Sandwich Recipes You’ll Love

Got some of those Subway-style rolls left? Then why not try one of these sandwich recipes?  This is definitely The BEST Egg Salad Recipe and you can use a Subway roll for it. Or keep it simple with Turkey Sliders for a filling lunch option.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Subway Crab Sandwich on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Subway Crab Sandwich

If you loved the Subway Seafood Sensation Sandwich, you'll love this easy copycat recipe! Make sure you use the right kind of mayo for this or it won't taste the same!
Course Lunch
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 sandwiches
Calories 556kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 14 ounces imitation crab meat
  • 1 cup Hellmans Or “Best Foods” brand of mayo
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 4 6-inch Sub bread rolls
  • Provolone cheese 2 per sandwich optional

Instructions

  • Pour crab meat in medium sized bowl and gently pull pieces apart if stuck together. (You can also shred the crab meat if preferred but the bigger pieces are more similar to the Subway sandwich, instead of shredded crab.)
  • Add mayo and salt, and stir until fully combined.
  • Layer optional slices of cheese on bread, and spoon equal parts of crab salad on to cheese, on each sandwich. (Amount will depend on how hearty you prefer your sandwich.)

Notes

Makes about 4 subs, depending on how much crab salad you put on each sandwich.

Nutrition

Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 556kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 43g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 25g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 1336mg | Potassium: 51mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 37IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg

Sugar Cookie Truffles

Sugar Cookie Truffles! It’s like your favorite sugar cookie took a dip in a pool of awesomeness and came out wearing a white chocolate tuxedo. If you’re all about easy yet impressive, and if the idea of “cookie meets truffle” makes your heart skip a beat, then stick around. We’re about to drop a no-bake dessert recipe that’s as cool as the other side of the pillow.

Loving the idea of an easy truffle recipe? Then make sure to also check out this Biscoff truffles recipe!

Sugar cookie truffles sitting on a white plate.

Whether you’re making truffles for the holidays (like these Easter truffles) or just to enjoy for a sweet tooth, these cookie truffles will be great for a get-together or even for a party of one!

This recipe uses Lofthouse cookies, although you can use other types of sugar cookies. However, if you’ve never had a Lofthouse cookie, they’re undeniably delicious and are a really soft cookie, topped with a scrumptious buttercream frosting, and are highly recommended for this recipe.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

❤️ Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • 4 Ingredients: With only 4 ingredients required (plus sprinkles if you desire) this is one to remember when you don’t want a big task!
  • Customize the Color: Although adding sprinkles is optional, you can choose your favorite colors for sprinkles for the occasion and you can also add food coloring to your chocolate if you’d prefer a different color truffle completely.
  • Ready in under an hour: These no-bake truffles are ready to enjoy within under an hour!

🧾 Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic. Make sure to check the full recipe card down below for ingredients and instructions all in one place.

Labeled ingredients for sugar cookie truffles.

📖 Substitutions

If you find that substitutions are needed or wanted, here are some suggestions that may help:

  • Cookie – If you prefer to use a different type of cookie, you can. Any soft cookie in the bakery at the grocery store will work or you can make your own soft sugar cookies too.
  • Cream Cheese – If you don’t want to use cream cheese, you can use frosting instead. You’ll use the same amount as you would the cream cheese.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 of how to make sugar cookie truffles using Lofthouse cookies.

STEP 1. Crumble cookies. Place your cookies into the bowl of your mixer and mix on medium speed until fine crumbs.

STEP 2. Cream cheese. Add in the cream cheese and mix until the mixture is smooth.

STEP 3. Roll the balls. Scoop about 1.5 tablespoons of the dough. Smush the dough in your hands and roll it into a ball.

STEP 4. Chill. Place the dough balls onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Place them in the fridge for 3 minutes.

Tips:
– Make sure you mix the dough well so it makes a paste.
– When rolling in to balls, work the dough in your hands to get out any lumps so they’re smooth balls.
– While rolling the balls, move your hands in different directions to create the circle shape.

Steps for making no bake sugar cookie truffles.

STEP 5. Melt Chocolate. Melt your chocolate with half the coconut oil over a double boiler or in the microwave in 30-second increments. Add the rest of the coconut oil if the chocolate is too thick.

STEP 6. Dip. Without sticking the fork in to one of the balls, pick it up and gently dip in the melted chocolate, covering it completely.

STEP 7. Remove. Carefully lift the ball out of the chocolate, allowing the excess chocolate to drip off back in to the bowl.

STEP 8. Rest. Place the chocolate-covered truffles on the sheet pan. Allow the chocolate to set for at least 10 minutes, and enjoy.

Sugar cookie truffles with sprinkles, on white plate.

💭 Recipe Pro Tips

  • For the melted chocolate, make sure the chocolate has the same consistency as paint. If your chocolate is too thick, it won’t look as well.
  • Place your sprinkles onto your truffles before the chocolate sets, so they stick.
Lofthouse sugar cookie truffles on white plate.

📋 Recipe FAQs

My chocolate seems too thick. What can I do to help get the right texture?

Adding more coconut oil will help thin out the chocolate.

What are Lofthouse cookies, and where do I find them?

You can typically find these soft, thick, sugar cookies that are topped with a colorful, thick, frosting and are usually in the bakery section of the grocery store.

Showing the inside of a sugar cookie truffle on a white plate, sitting next to whole truffles.

❄️ Storage

If you have leftover cookies, it’s best to store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.

🍪 More No-Bake Recipes You’ll Love

Do you love no-bake desserts like this one? We’ve picked out some of our similar favorite no-bake desserts for you to try too:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Sugar cookie truffles on white plate, with seeing the inside of one.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Sugar Cookie Truffles

These sugar cookie truffles are made using Lofthouse cookies and a few other ingredients to create a delicious no-bake treat.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 30 minutes
Chill Time 13 minutes
Total Time 43 minutes
Servings 12 truffles
Calories 187kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 10 Lofthouse Cookies
  • 4 ounces cream cheese
  • 8 ounces white dipping chocolate
  • 1-2 Tablespoons coconut oil
  • Sprinkles optional

Instructions

  • Place your cookies into the bowl of your mixer and mix on medium speed until fine crumbs.
  • Add in the cream cheese and mix until the mixture is smooth.
  • Scoop about 1.5 tablespoons of the dough. Smush the dough in your hands and roll it into a ball.
  • Place the dough balls onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Place them in the fridge for 3 minutes.
  • Melt your chocolate with half the coconut oil over a double boiler or in the microwave in 30-second increments. Add the rest of the coconut oil if the chocolate is too thick.
  • Dip your balls into the chocolate using a fork and top them with your sprinkles.
  • Place them on the sheet pan. Allow the chocolate to set for at least 10 minutes, and enjoy.

Notes

Tips:
  • For the melted chocolate, make sure the chocolate has the same consistency as paint. If your chocolate is too thick, it won’t look as well.
  • Place your sprinkles onto your truffles before the chocolate sets, so they stick.

Nutrition

Serving: 1truffle | Calories: 187kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 76mg | Potassium: 74mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 140IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 0.3mg

Frito Chili Pie

This Frito Chili Pie is the perfect dish to serve for game day, at a party, or for busy weeknights! Top Fritos with this chili recipe, cheese, shredded cheese, green onions, and your favorite toppings!

Frito Chili Pie Recipe

If you’re looking for more chili-related recipes, then you’ll love these next! Simple chili recipe, chili mac, vegetarian chili, and white chicken chili! Or use chili to top these chili cheese corn dogs with.

If we’re having a low-key party, a taco bar or nacho bar is usually the plan. The best thing is that it’s almost like everyone can have their own little Frito pie casserole and top it with whatever toppings they prefer!

But if I’m being honest, I’ll probably make these AND the burgers in the oven since they’re both easy party foods that can be made in bulk!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

What is a Frito Chili Pie?

It’s a layered dish consisting of Fritos Corn Chips, a thick chili recipe, and toppings such as shredded cheese, diced onions and more! Such an easy recipe too!

Are chili Frito pies like walking tacos?

Yes! But the difference is that a chili Frito pie would be served right in the small bag of Fritos instead of on a plate, in a bowl or in a food boat.

Ingredients for Frito Pie

What you’ll see below, are the ingredients for a basic Frito pie. However, it is so much fun to top the chili pie with your favorite ingredients and I’ll give you a great list of topping ideas below as well, so you’re prepared and ready for the ultimate Frito pie recipe!

Ingredients for Frito Chili Pie recipe

Chili Recipe

You’ll want to start by making the chili. You can either follow the chili recipe I’ve provided below, use this family-favorite chili recipe or use your own favorite chili which can even be canned chili!

If using the chili recipe included in this post, here are some notes about the key ingredients.

Make sure to check the recipe card below for the full list of ingredients for the recipe.

  • ground beef (or ground deer meat for venison chili – see more easy ground beef recipes)
  • Rotel – or any brand of diced tomatoes and green chilies.
  • sugar – sugar actually helps offset the acidity in chili!

Frito Pie Ingredients

To assemble the Frito pie (as pictured), you’ll need the following, remaining ingredients:

  • Fritos – or your favorite brand of corn chips
  • Shredded cheese – shredding your own always tastes better but pre-shredded is absolutely ok to use!
  • Diced onion – red, white, or yellow onions work

How to Make a Frito Chili Pie

Steps 1-4 of how to make Frito chili pie.
  1. In a large skillet or pot, brown the ground beef, onion, and garlic at medium heat. 
  2. Drain excess fat and place back in pot.
  3. Add kidney beans, tomato paste, Rotel, chili powder, salt, sugar, and cumin.  Stir together well. Turn the heat down to medium-low.  Allow the mixture to simmer uncovered for 20 minutes.  
Frito Boat - corn chips ready for chili
  1. Pour a bag of Fritos corn chips onto a serving dish, or pour a single serving of Fritos onto each person’s plate.
Pour Chili over fritos
  1. Serve a serving of chili over Frito chips.
Shredded cheddar cheese on chili pie
  1. Sprinkle with shredded cheddar cheese, and any additional toppings! (See list of ideas below!)

Hint: If your chili is still hot, it should melt the shredded cheese on top. However, if it’s not hot enough, you may want to nuke your Frito pie for a few seconds to get the cheese to melt, if desired!

Melted cheese on frito chili pie in food boat

Topping Ideas for Frito Chili Pies

I don’t know about you but the more the merrier when it comes to toppings for Frito pies! Here are some ideas that you can put out for your family or guests when hosting so they can make it just how they like it!

Frito Chili Pie Toppings

Storage

If you have leftovers, it’s best to store the chili, Fritos and toppings, separate so the crunchy corn chips do not get soggy.

How to Store Chili

The chili will keep for 3 days in the fridge, if kept in an airtight container. Or, you can freeze it for up to 3 months.  

How to Store Fritos

If you don’t have the original bag the Fritos corn chips came in, you can pour them in to a ziptop plastic bag or a bag that’s sealed, in the pantry.

How to Store Toppings

If you have chopped toppings left over, it will depend on the topping; however, it’s best to store the toppings separately.

Frito Chili Pie Recipe

Variations for a Chili Pie

Love mixing things up? I do too sometimes! Here are answers to some popular questions:

Can I use Chili Cheese Fritos instead?
Absolutely! That’s a great substitution! You can also use Nacho Cheese Doritos, Cool Ranch Doritos or your favorite chips!

Can I use my own chili recipe?
Of course! Your chili recipe should work just fine!

Do you love tater tots?

Then you’ll LOVE these loaded tater tots!

Top Tips

Make a big batch of chili and freeze it, and keep items like Fritos and shredded cheese on hand so you can make this on a weeknight when you need a fast dinner idea!

Want an even faster recipe?

Use canned chili or store-bought chili to make this in a flash!

Slow Cooker Chili

If you’re hosting a party, make the chili and place it in a slow cooker (or Instant Pot if you have one!) to keep on “warm” so guests can make their own chili pies as they please!

FAQs and Expert Tips

What goes well with Frito pie?

A Frito chili pie can be a main dish in itself and pairs really well with light side dishes like Spanish rice, a vegetable tray, and Instant Pot corn on the cob.

Could you use other meats for the chili pie instead of beef?

Absolutely. Feel free to substitue the ground beef for ground turkey, chicken, venison or even pork sausage!

Are Frito chili pies spicy?

Not this recipe. However if you use a recipe for a spicy chili, it can be. If you prefer a spicy Frito pie, you can add hot sauce and or spices like chili powder or cayenne pepper.

More Easy Dinner Recipes

If you’re a fan of quick and easy dinners, you’ll also love these popular dinner recipes: Doritos Chicken Casserole and BBQ Nachos (using leftover meats)!

Then if you really loved this chili pie, you’re really going to love this layered taco dip and pizza monkey bread because they’re family favorites!

Recipe

Fritos, chili, cheese, onions, all piled together in cardboard dish.
Print Pin
4.80 from 10 votes

Easy Frito Chili Pie

This Frito Chili Pie is the perfect dish to serve for game day, at a party or for busy weeknights! Top Fritos with this chili recipe, cheese, shredded cheese, green onions, and your favorite toppings!
Course Appetizer, Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 597kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

Family Favorite Chili Recipe

Another Optional Chili Recipe

  • 1 pound ground beef
  • 1 medium onion diced
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 14 ounces can of kidney beans undrained
  • 5.5 ounces can tomato paste
  • 10 ounces can rotel diced tomatoes and green chilies
  • 2 tablespoons chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon sugar
  • 1.5 teaspoon ground cumin

Making the Frito Pie

  • 9.25 ounces bag of Fritos
  • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese if desired

Instructions

  • In a large skillet or pot, brown the ground beef, onion, and garlic at medium heat.
  • Drain excess fat.
  • Add kidney beans, tomato paste, rotel, chili powder, salt, sugar, and cumin and stir until evenly blended.
  • Turn the heat down to medium-low and allow the mixture to simmer uncovered for 20 minutes.
  • Pour a bag of fritos onto a serving dish, or pour a single serving of fritos onto each person’s plate.  
  • Serve the chili over Fritos and sprinkle with shredded cheddar cheese, and use desired toppings. (See additional topping ideas in notes!)

Notes

Additional Topping Ideas:
  • shredded lettuce
  • easy guacamole recipe
  • black olives
  • taco sauce
  • sour cream
  • diced onions
  • sliced jalapeno peppers
  • diced tomatoes
  • chopped bell peppers
  • hot sauce
  • ranch dressing or jalapeno ranch dressing
  • fresh cilantro
  • rice

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 597kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 1218mg | Potassium: 896mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1438IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 283mg | Iron: 5mg

John Wayne Casserole

What is John Wayne Casserole? It’s a delicious dish made up of ground beef and pork, taco seasoning, veggies, and a creamy base of cheeses.

Casserole recipes are a great easy dinner idea because most of them consist of a combination of items that can be baked all together, and the result is a delicious blend of flavors!

Serving of John Wayne Casserole being lifted out of baking dish.

If you love a meat and cheese casserole like this great recipe, then you’re also going to love similar recipes like this cheeseburger casserole, this hamburger hashbrown casserole, and this french onion casserole!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It’s hearty: If you’re looking for a fulfilling dish, this hearty casserole is the one! Full of meat and cheeses, it’s loaded with protein.
  • For a potluck: Need a dish to take to a gathering? This dish will be the star of the show with the jalapenos, and how it looks different than the other dishes!

Ingredients Needed

Head on over to the grocery store to grab the following simple ingredients for this easy casserole recipe. Don’t forget to scroll to the recipe card for exact measurements. 

Labeled ingredients for John Wayne casserole.

We’ve provided a few notes about some of the ingredients in case you find it helpful:

  • Crescent Roll dough – Store-bought or homemade pizza dough will work here as well. You can use a rolling pin to roll the dough out to line the bottom and sides of the casserole dish. Some may even prefer a biscuit crust.
  • Ground pork – You could use ground beef or ground turkey instead if you’d like. 
  • Green bell peppers – You can slice or chop the bell pepper. The choice is yours. Or you could even use a red bell pepper if you prefer.
  • Sweet onion – Yellow or white onions will work as well. 
  • Rotel – Feel free to use fresh diced tomatoes and chilis instead. 
  • Canned jalapenos – Not a spicey fan? Go ahead and leave the jalapenos out. 
  • Mayonnaise – Miracle Whip will work here too.  
  • Shredded cheddar cheese – Cheddar is my favorite but Monterey jack or Colby jack cheese would make great substitutions. 

Note: Corn Makes an excellent optional ingredient to this recipe! Just add a layer of 1 cup of sweet corn between the meat and peppers. We even used southwest corn in this walking taco casserole recipe!

Equipment

Here’s what you’ll need in terms of supplies to make this original John Wayne casserole recipe.

  • 9 X 13-inch baking dish 
  • Large heavy-bottomed skillet
  • Spoon or spatula for mixing
  • Mixing bowl
  • Oven

How to Make John Wayne Casserole

*Be sure to see the printable recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

This easy ground beef casserole recipe is easy to make but we still want to show you the steps of how to make this so it’s helpful!

Prep. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and grease (or use parchment paper) a 9 X 13-inch baking pan with non-stick cooking spray. 

Steps 1-4 of how to make John Wayne Casserole.

STEP 1. Make the crust. Line the pan with the Crescent Roll dough. The dough should completely cover the bottom and stretch to the sides of the pan. Bake for 10 minutes.

STEP 2. Remove. Remove the pan from the oven and set aside.

STEP 3. Cook the meat. Using a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the beef, pork, and taco seasoning and sauté until the meat mixture is browned and cooked through, breaking it up and mixing as you go. Drain and remove the meat from the skillet. 

STEP 4. Cook the veggies. In the same skillet, sauté the bell pepper and diced onions until softened. 

Tip: If you don’t want the casserole too spicy, you can leave off the jalapeno peppers.

Steps 5-8 on how to make John Wayne Casserole.

STEP 5. Assemble the casserole. Spread the seasoned, cooked meat over the Crescent Roll crust followed by the Rotel. Next, layer in the softened bell pepper and onions on top of the ground beef mixture, followed by ¼ cup of the jalapenos. 

STEP 6. Make the creamy topping. Stir together the sour cream, mayonnaise, cream cheese, and then fold in 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese.

STEP 7. Spread the mixture. Spread the sour cream mixture over the casserole.

STEP 8. Add cheese and jalapenos. Top with the remaining 2 cups of cheddar cheese and ¼ cup of jalapeño peppers. 

STEP 9. Bake. Pop the casserole in the preheated oven and bake for 35 minutes or until the cheese is melted and the casserole is heated throughout.

Inside of casserole dish showing John Wayne Casserole ingredients.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Storebought Crescent Rolls. Crescent Roll dough is so convenient but, if you have time on your hands, you can make your own dough and use it in this recipe.
  • Can this be made ahead of time? One of the beautiful things about casseroles (including this one) is that you easily make one ahead of time. See below for tips on making this a freezer meal! 
Serving of John Wayne casserole on white plate.

Recipe FAQs


Why is it called John Wayne casserole?

Back in the ’70s, John Wayne contributed an almost identical recipe to a cookbook loaded with celebrity favorites. The book is called Cooking with Love From Cara Connery and Her Friends. No one knows where Wayne got the original recipe but it’s been around ever since. 

What is the oldest known casserole?

Mac and cheese (although not considered a casserole necessarily anymore) is the oldest known casserole.

What to Serve with John Wayne Casserole

When it comes to side dishes for casseroles, we like leafy greens or breads. For this recipe, we really like serving this side salad with it and this Italian white bread.

Storage

Leftover Casserole: This casserole makes for wonderful leftovers. It stores and reheats well. Allow the casserole to cool completely before covering it in a layer of plastic wrap and placing it in the refrigerator. You can keep it there for up to 4 days. You can also scoop the casserole out of your dish and store it in a separate airtight container.

Can you freeze this casserole? Yes. Prepare the recipe up until the point of baking, cover it in 2 layers of plastic wrap, and pop it in the freezer. It can stay there for up to 3 months.

Thawing: If you freeze this casserole- when you’re ready to serve, transfer the casserole to the refrigerator to thaw. Remove the plastic wrap and cover with aluminum foil. Bake at 325 degrees F for 20-30 minutes or until heated through. You can also pop an individual slice in the microwave. Microwave in 30-second intervals until the portion is heated through. 

More Casserole Recipes You’ll Love

If you love casseroles or easy dinner ideas, you’ll love these other recipes that we have for you:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Serving of John Wayne Casserole on a white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 6 votes

John Wayne Casserole

John Wayne Casserole is a delicious blend of meats and cheeses, and combined with a creamy base as well has peppers and spices.
Course Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 9 servings
Calories 696kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 pack Crescent Roll dough
  • 1 pound ground beef
  • 1 pound ground pork
  • 1 ounce pack taco seasoning
  • 1 green pepper chopped
  • 10 ounce can Rotel
  • ½ cup canned sliced jalapenos divided
  • ½ cup sour cream
  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • 8 ounces cream cheese
  • 3 cups shredded cheddar cheese divided

Instructions

  • Prep. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and grease a 9 X 13-inch baking pan with nonstick cooking spray.
  • Make the crust. Line the pan with the Crescent Roll dough. The dough should completely cover the bottom and stretched to the sides of the pan. Bake for 10 minutes.
  • Cook the meat. Using a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the beef, pork, and taco seasoning and sauté until the meat is browned and cooked through, breaking it up and mixing as you go. Drain and remove the meat from the skillet.
  • Cook the veggies. In the same skillet, sauté the green peppers and onion until softened.
  •  Assemble the casserole. Spread the seasoned, cooked meat over the Crescent Roll crust followed by the Rotel. Next, layer in the softened bell pepper and onions followed by ¼ cup of the jalapenos. 
  • Add the creamy topping. Stir together the sour cream, mayonnaise, cream cheese, and then fold in 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese. Spread the mixture over the casserole and top with the remaining 2 cups of cheddar cheese and ¼ cup of jalapenos. 
  • Bake. Pop the casserole in the oven and bake for 35 minutes or until the cheese is melted and the casserole is heated throughout.

Notes

Leftovers store and reheat well. Allow the casserole to cool completely before covering it in a layer of plastic wrap and placing it in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
Can you freeze this casserole? Yes, cover it in 2 layers of plastic wrap and pop it in the freezer. It can stay there for up to 3 months.
Thawing: Transfer the casserole to the refrigerator to thaw. Remove the plastic wrap and cover with aluminum foil. Bake at 325 degrees F for 20-30 minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 696kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 30g | Fat: 57g | Saturated Fat: 24g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 146mg | Sodium: 925mg | Potassium: 469mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1242IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 331mg | Iron: 3mg

Sweet and Spicy Pumpkin Seeds

This roasted sweet and spicy pumpkin seed recipe is incredibly easy and they have tons of flavor. The spice comes from the chili powder and can be adjusted to your preference.

Plus, while you’re making these to snack on, you might as well make our favorite “Texas Trash” to snack on too, and these chocolate-covered pumpkin strawberries!

This recipe and post was originally published in 2021, and updated in August 2023.

Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds on wooden cutting board.

Anything pumpkin during the fall months is a must! So if you have pumpkin on your mind, I want to make sure you know about these pumpkin cheesecake bars and this pumpkin pie with graham cracker crust.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Use up more of your pumpkin: If you have seeds from your pumpkin carving, don’t waste the seeds! This is a great way to use them up.
  • The flavor: Boring pumpkin seeds are just as wasteful as throwing them out. This recipe gives the seeds tons of flavor.
  • Make them ahead of time: These crunchy pumpkin seeds freeze and thaw nicely. Once they have cooled completely, seal them in an airtight container or a sturdy Ziploc bag (be sure to get as much air out as possible) and store them in the freezer. They will stay good for up to 6 months. Allow them to thaw at room temperature before diving in. 

Ingredients Needed

Here’s what you’ll need to make these pumpkin seeds – but make sure you scroll to the recipe card at the bottom to see all of the recipe’s details in one place.

  • Pumpkin seeds
  • Olive oil – Feel free to use coconut oil (or really any other quality cooking oil) instead. Just note that each oil will have a slightly different taste.   
  • Honey – You could use agave instead. 
  • Salt 
  • Pepper
  • Chili powder 
  • Cinnamon – Leave the cinnamon out if you’re not in a cinnamon kind of mood. You could also use pumpkin spice in place of the cinnamon and nutmeg. 
  • Nutmeg – You can leave the nutmeg out if you’d like. Pumpkin spice will also work in place of the cinnamon and nutmeg.
  • Brown sugar 
  • Worcestershire sauce – The Worcestershire sauce is optional but I think it adds a wonderful savory element to this subtly sweet snack. 

Variations

You could make these crispy pumpkin seeds in the air fryer instead of the oven if you’d like. Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F and line its basket with parchment paper to prevent the seeds from falling through. Season the seeds as you normally would, arrange them in the basket of the air fryer, and air fry for 20 minutes, shaking halfway through. 

Equipment

Check your kitchen for the following items before you get cooking. 

  • Paper towels – To dry the seeds. 
  • Mixing bowls
  • Wooden spoon or spatula – To stir the seeds. 
  • Baking sheet 
  • Parchments paper 

What if I don’t have parchment paper? If you don’t have parchment paper, you can use nonstick cooking spray instead. Just be extra sure to give the seeds a good stir a couple of times as they roast.  

How to Make This Pumpkin Seeds Recipe

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

  • Prep. Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F and line a baking pan with parchment paper. 
  • Clean. If you are using fresh pumpkin seeds, rinse them of their pulp and dry them thoroughly. If you are using store-bought seeds, you can skip this step. 
Steps 1-4 of how to make spicy pumpkin seeds.
  • Make the spice mixture. Whisk together the honey, Worcestershire, salt, pepper, chili powder, cinnamon, nutmeg, and brown sugar. 
  • Season. Toss the pumpkin seeds with the olive oil mixture to coat and then with the spice mixture. 
  • Bake. Sprinkle the seasoned seeds in an even layer over the prepared baking sheet. Bake for 50 minutes or until golden brown. Give the seeds a stir every 15 minutes or so. 
Roasted pumpkin seeds on a cookie sheet.

Should I eat sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds warm or cold?: Sweet and spicy roasted pumpkin seeds are best enjoyed at room temperature. Once they come out of the oven, they will continue to crisp up as they cool. So have a little patience and give them some time to do their thing. 

Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds on a baking sheet.

Recipe FAQs

What are pumpkin seeds vs. pepitas?

Pumpkin seeds and pepitas are often confused. The term pepita refers to a pumpkin seed that has been shelled. They are usually roasted and generally come from Styrian pumpkins, specifically.  


Do I have to use store-bought pumpkin seeds or can I make my own?

You can 100% use your own. This recipe is a great way to use the pumpkin seeds you might otherwise throw away from your carving pumpkins (and/or a pie pumpkins). Treat them just as you would store-bought pumpkin seeds; just be sure to clean and dry them very well. If you have the time, spread your pumpkin seeds over a baking sheet and allow them to dry out for several hours (up to overnight) before seasoning and roasting. 

Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds in white bowl.

Storage

Once the pumpkin seeds have fully cooled, seal them in an airtight container and store them on the countertop  (ideally out of the sun) for up to 1 month, in the fridge for up to 3 months, or in the freezer for up to 6 months. If you decide to freeze them, allow the seeds to thaw at room temperature before enjoying them. 

More Snack Recipes You’ll Love

If you love fun snacks, then you’ll also love this Sriracha and Honey Snack Mix and these easy snack recipes:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds in a white bowl.
Print Pin
3.67 from 3 votes

Sweet and Spicy Pumpkin Seed Recipe

These roasted sweet and spicy pumpkin seeds are made using simple ingredients and they have so much flavor.
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 1 cup
Calories 618kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 cup pumpkin seeds
  • 1 Tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 Tablespoon honey
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon pepper
  • 1 ½ teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon nutmeg
  • 1 Tablespoon brown sugar
  • ½ Tablespoon Worcestershire sauce

Instructions

  • Prep. Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F and line a baking pan with parchment paper.
  •  Clean. If you are using fresh pumpkin seeds, rinse them of their pulp and dry them thoroughly. If you are using store-bought seeds, you can skip this step.  
  • Make the spice mixture. Whisk together the honey, Worcestershire, salt, pepper, chili powder, cinnamon, nutmeg, and brown sugar. 
  • Season. Toss the pumpkin seeds with the olive oil mixture to coat and then with the spice mixture. 
  • Bake. Sprinkle the seasoned seeds in an even layer over the prepared baking sheet. Bake for 50 minutes or until golden brown. Give the seeds a stir every 15 minutes or so.

Notes

If you’d like to make a sweet snack instead, boil the seeds with sugar rather than salt, and at the seasoning stage, add sugar or brown sugar, cinnamon, etc.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 618kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 15g | Monounsaturated Fat: 21g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Sodium: 3625mg | Potassium: 662mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 327IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 7mg

Cream Cheese Corn Dip

This easy-to-make cream cheese corn dip recipe is a stellar blend of sweet, savory, and creamy elements, making it the perfect appetizer recipe for any occasion such as summer cookouts, an adult game night, or even a last-minute delicious snack recipe.

Crack Corn Dip on tortilla chip.

Imagine the taste of succulent corn, blended with tangy cheese and a secret blend of spices, served with a crunch of fresh tortilla chips. This will quickly become one of your favorite dips.

Have the urge to make some more corn recipes after trying this dip? A simple idea is Instant Pot Corn on the Cob which works as a side dish for almost any main meal. Or you could try using it in a main course such as Pasta with Corn and Tomatoes that will fill up the whole family.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Easy to make: The dip is quick to prepare and just needs time to chill, no cooking required!
  • Serve hot or cold: If you do want a warm dip, you can also easily heat this up with the instructions below.
  • Create a big batch: The recipe makes around 5 cups but you can create a bigger batch as needed.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a handful of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the simple ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for corn dip with cream cheese.
  • Corn – We use southwest corn for the best results, it comes in a can and is very easy to use.
  • Cream – Sour cream is the best for the recipe and is mixed with mayonnaise and cream cheese to get the best dip consistency.
  • Jalapenos –  We use canned jalapenos, just give them a thorough drain before using. You can use fresh ones if you prefer.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Green chili peppers: If green chili peppers are unavailable, feel free to substitute them with any other chili peppers you have on hand. For a milder flavor, use canned chili peppers. You can also try green chilies. 
  • Jalapenos: If jalapenos are too spicy for your liking or you can’t find them, you can substitute them with bell peppers for a milder flavor. If you still want a bit of heat, consider using mild Anaheim peppers.
  • Green Onions: Chives can be a great substitute for green onions, offering a similar but milder flavor. If you need a stronger flavor, you can use small amounts of white or yellow onions instead.
  • Colby Jack Cheese: In the absence of Colby Jack cheese, you can use a mix of Colby and Monterey Jack cheese. Cheddar cheese can also serve as a substitute due to its similar texture and taste.
  • Pepper Jack Cheese: If you don’t have access to Pepper Jack Cheese, Monterey Jack is a good alternative. For a spicy kick similar to Pepper Jack, you can add a dash of crushed red pepper or a small amount of jalapenos to the Monterey Jack cheese.

Variations

This Crack Corn Dip recipe is quite versatile and allows for several tweaks, based on your personal preference or dietary needs:

  • Vegan Crack Corn Dip: Substitute dairy products with vegan-friendly alternatives. Use vegan cream cheese, vegan mayonnaise, and vegan sour cream for the base. Vegan cheese can replace Colby Jack and Pepper Jack cheese. 
  • Spicy Crack Corn Dip: If you have a penchant for a hotter dip, consider doubling the jalapenos and adding a dash of hot sauce. You could also include a pinch of cayenne pepper or another delicious way is to use a hotter variety of chili peppers. 
  • Mexican-style Crack Corn Dip: Add a Mexican twist by incorporating black beans, diced tomatoes, and a sprinkle of taco seasoning. You could also top the dip with fresh cilantro and a squeeze of lime juice for added zest. You’ll love this Mexican Corn Dip for the perfect Mexican appetizer!
  • Bacon Corn Dip: For a meatier version, include crispy, pre-cooked bacon pieces into the mix. The smoky flavor of the bacon pairs wonderfully with the creamy, sweet corn base for this great dip.

How to Make Cream Cheese Corn Dip

This corn dip recipe is broken into 2 components:

  • Make the basic dip
  • Add the extra flavor

For optimal mixing, it is recommended to use cream cheese at room temperature. To quickly soften the cream cheese, place it in a microwave-safe serving bowl and heat it in 30-second intervals until it stirs smoothly into your dip mixture.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Mix the dip. In a large bowl, blend together mayonnaise, sour cream, cream cheese, and garlic until thoroughly combined, resulting in a velvety and smooth mixture. (Image 1-2).

Steps 1-4 of making crack corn dip.

STEP 2: Add the flavor. Incorporate southwest corn, green chili peppers, jalapenos, green onion bacon crumbles, Colby jack cheese, pepper jack cheese, and ground black pepper into the mayonnaise mixture. Ensure thorough blending for a delectable combination. (Image 3-4).

STEP 3: Chill the mixture. Refrigerate, covered, for a minimum of 1 hour to achieve optimal chilling.

STEP 4: Add toppings and serve. Before serving, generously sprinkle your favorite corn chips with extra Colby jack cheese and a garnish of finely chopped green onions.

Corn dip mixed and in white bowl, with corn chip in dip.

BONUS STEP: How to heat the dip. Begin by preheating your oven to 350 degrees. Next, generously grease an 8×8 baking dish. Carefully place the crack corn dip into the prepared baking dish, ensuring it is evenly spread. Cover the dish and heat it for approximately 20 minutes, or until the dip is heated throughout and the cheese is beautifully melted.

Sprinkle extra Colby jack cheese on top and bake the dip uncovered for approximately 5 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and gooey. Serve warm with corn chips for a deliciously satisfying treat.

Tortilla chip dipping in to corn dip, lifting out a bite.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Cheese Recommendations: Cheeses can vary drastically in flavor. For a unique touch, try using smoked cheeses or cheeses infused with herbs or spices.
  • Dip Consistency: If you prefer your dip to be thicker, consider reducing the amount of sour cream or adding more cheese. Conversely, for a thinner dip, you could add a splash of milk or a bit more sour cream.

Recipe FAQs

Is there a vegan alternative for this dip?  

Yes, you can make a vegan version of this dip by using dairy-free alternatives for the cream cheese, mayonnaise, sour cream, and cheese. There are numerous plant-based products available in the market that can be used as substitutes.

What can I substitute for jalapenos if I don’t want the dip to be spicy?

If you want to reduce the heat, you can substitute jalapenos with bell peppers. They provide a similar texture without spiciness.

Can I use pre-shredded cheese for this recipe? 

While pre-shredded cheese is certainly convenient, shredding your own cheese is recommended for the best results. Pre-shredded cheese often contains anti-caking agents and doesn’t melt as smoothly.

Do I have to use store-bought southwest corn, or can I make my own?

You don’t need to rely on store-bought southwest corn; instead, you can create your own blend and incorporate it into this recipe. Southwest corn consists of a delightful combination of yellow corn, poblano peppers, and red peppers, seasoned with a touch of chili spice.

Why is my dip soggy?

It is important to thoroughly drain all canned ingredients to achieve the desired consistency of a firm dip. Failure to do so may result in a slightly liquid texture, whereas a firm dip texture is preferred. Additionally, refrigerating the dip will further enhance its firmness, provided that the canned ingredients were properly drained beforehand.

What to Serve with Cream Cheese Corn Dip

Cream Cheese Corn Dip pairs beautifully with a variety of snacks and side dishes. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Tortilla Chips: The classic choice for any dip, the crunch and light flavor of tortilla chips make them an excellent carrier for the rich, creamy dip.
  • Vegetables: For a healthier option, serve with an array of colorful, crisp vegetables such as carrot sticks, celery sticks, bell pepper strips, and cucumber slices.
  • Toasted Baguette: Thinly sliced and lightly toasted baguette rounds impart a delightful crunch and a subtle, toasty flavor that complements the corn dip perfectly.
  • Crackers: Choose from a variety of crackers, like whole grain, multigrain, or Ritz for added flavor and texture.
  • Grilled Chicken or Steak Skewers: For a heartier appetizer, try serving the dip alongside grilled chicken or steak skewers. The bold, smoky flavors of the grilled meat contrast beautifully with the creamy, cheesy dip.
  • Pita Chips: Thick, crunchy pita chips can hold up to the hearty corn dip without getting soggy. Plus, they add a lovely toasted flavor. 

Remember, you can always mix and match these options to create a serving platter that caters to all tastes and dietary preferences. Plain potato chips are also a great option for last-minute snacks.

Storage

Storing and preserving Crack Corn Dip is quite straightforward. After serving, immediately refrigerate and store leftovers in an airtight container. This dip will stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. 

If you’re thinking about freezing, Crack Corn Dip freezes well due to the high dairy content. To freeze, place the dip in a freezer-safe container, leaving about half an inch of space at the top to allow the dip to expand as it freezes. It can be frozen for up to 2 months. When ready to use, defrost overnight in the refrigerator.

To make Crack Corn Dip ahead of time, prepare it as instructed, excluding the additional cheese topping and baking steps. Seal in an air-tight container and refrigerate until ready to use. This dip can be made up to 2 days in advance. When ready to serve, add the additional cheese topping and bake as per the instructions, adding a few extra minutes to the baking time to account for starting from a chilled state.

More Appetizer Recipes You’ll Love

Want some more ideas for an easy appetizer and dips? One of our favorites is this Rotel dip with ground beef. Or you could try a Baked Brie with Maple Syrup and Bacon for a melting cheese option that everyone will enjoy.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Chip holding a bite of crack corn dip, above bowl of dip.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Cream Cheese Corn Dip

This cream cheese corn dip is easy to make and has tons of flavor with the type of corn, all the cheeses and flavors of jalapenos, green chili peppers, and bacon!
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Chill Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 5 cups
Calories 610kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 cup mayonnaise
  • ¾ cup sour cream
  • 2 ounces cream cheese softened
  • 1 tablespoon garlic minced
  • 2 15.2 cans southwest corn drained well
  • 1 4 ounce can chopped green chili peppers drained
  • ¼ cup canned chopped jalapenos drained
  • ½ cup green onion chopped, plus extra for topping
  • ⅓ cup bacon crumbles
  • 1 cup Colby Jack Cheese shredded, plus extra for topping
  • 1 cup pepper jack cheese shredded
  • 1 tablespoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • In a large bowl, combine mayonnaise, sour cream, cream cheese, and garlic until well mixed and smooth.
  • Add southwest corn, green chili peppers, jalapenos, green onion bacon crumbles, Colby jack cheese, pepper jack cheese, and ground black pepper to the mayonnaise mixture and combine well.
  • Cover and chill in your refrigerator for at least 1 hour.
  • Top with extra Colby jack cheese and chopped green onions before serving with your favorite corn chips.

Notes

Using pre-shredded cheese: While pre-shredded cheese is certainly convenient, shredding your own cheese is recommended for the best results. Pre-shredded cheese often contains anti-caking agents and doesn’t melt as smoothly.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 610kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 59g | Saturated Fat: 21g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 21g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 96mg | Sodium: 628mg | Potassium: 169mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 939IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 414mg | Iron: 1mg

Pumpkin Pie with Graham Cracker Crust

Everyone loves a traditional pumpkin pie, but sometimes you want something new. Enter this No Bake Pumpkin Pie! Simply mix up pudding, pumpkin, and whipped topping for a creamy and delicious dessert in 10 minutes, that may just become one of your favorite pie recipes!

Or, if you’re also a cheesecake fan, then you’ll want to make sure to try these pumpkin cheesecake bites too.

Slice of pumpkin pie on spatula.

I just love a good no-bake dessert. Many need hours of chill time, but takes just minutes to prepare. I highly recommend planning no-bake desserts for parties because you can make them the night before and forget about them! Besides pie, there are always classic chocolate no-bake cookies or quick mini cherry cheesecakes. Any one you choose will be a huge hit! But if pie is still on the menu, this cinnamon butterscotch pie is a no-bake pie that’s a must-make.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Ready in 10 minutes: It only takes 10 minutes of hands-on time to prepare this quick no-bake pumpkin pie.
  • Make-ahead recipe: This pie requires at least 3 hours in the fridge, so plan accordingly.
  • Kids can make: No oven or stove means this is easy and safe for kids to practice their cooking skills. Teach them measuring and new skills like folding in ingredients!

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for pumpkin pie with graham cracker crust.
  • Pumpkin – Make sure you are using puree and not pumpkin pie mix. This is only pumpkin with no spices or other ingredients added.
  • Pudding – Double-check that you picked up the instant pudding and NOT cook and serve. This is important to achieve the right texture.
  • Whipped topping – Yup, this recipe is best with that little blue tub in the frozen section! Thaw before using.
  • Half and half – The fat here is necessary for a thick, creamy texture in the finished pie. Don’t swap in low-fat milk.
  • Graham cracker crust – Store-bought graham cracker crust is perfect here, but you can also feel free to make your own if that’s what you prefer, or even use a Biscoff crust recipe. Just remember that adds time as it usually needs to bake and cool first.

Substitutions

Other than making your own pie crust, I don’t really recommend any substitutions for this recipe. Freshly whipped cream will “break” and make your pie runny compared to prepared whipped topping, which contains stabilizers. We need the fat in the half and half for the pie to set correctly, meaning you can’t use regular milk, though you can use heavy cream if that is what you have on hand.

Equipment

Just a whisk is required here! While you could use the whisk attachment of an electric mixer for the pudding, it isn’t truly required. I love that this means it’s super simple for kids to help out!

How to Make No Bake Pumpkin Pudding Pie

Leave yourself enough time to chill the pie properly! I suggest at least 3 hours, so you could make this after lunch if serving in the evening. Overnight is generally best though!

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 how to make pumpkin pie with graham cracker crust.

STEP 1. Begin mixing. Add the brown sugar and pumpkin pie spice to a large bowl (Image 1). Add in the boxed pudding mix and whisk to combine (Image 2).

STEP 2. Whisk in the half and half. Carefully add the half and half to the powder in the bowl, then whisk for up to 2 minutes, until the pudding begins to thicken.

Tip: Ensure you buy instant pudding and plain pumpkin puree for this recipe. Cook-and-serve pudding won’t set correctly, and the pumpkin pie mix has extra ingredients added.

Steps 5-8 collage of making no bake pumpkin pie.

STEP 3. Add pumpkin. Plop the pumpkin right in and stir until smooth (Images 5 and 6).

STEP 4. Fold in topping. Use a rubber spatula to gently fold the whipped topping into the pumpkin mixture until it is completely incorporated (Images 7 and 8).

No bake pumpkin pie in graham cracker crust, sitting on kitchen counter.

STEP 5. Pour in crust. Pour the prepared filling into the graham cracker crust, and gently smooth out the top with your spatula.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Use chilled ingredients. The half-and-half needs to be really cold to help the pudding mixture thicken right away. Keep everything in the fridge until needed.
  • Fold gently. If folding is a new technique for you, here’s a tip: Use a rubber spatula and gently scrape the bottom of the bowl to bring the pudding mixture up into the whipped topping. Turn the bowl and repeat, until you have incorporated the whipped topping without losing the “fluff.”
Whipped topping added on top of no bake pumpkin pie.

Recipe FAQs

Can I make this dairy-free?

Unfortunately, most non-dairy substitutes do not allow pudding to set correctly. This recipe is best with regular dairy half and half or heavy cream.

How far ahead can I make dessert?

This pie will last about three days in the fridge, and the timer starts when you assemble it. Storebought crust is often thinner and more fragile than a homemade graham cracker crust, and the heavy filling could cause it to crack.

How should I serve pumpkin pudding pie?

Keep in the fridge until ready to serve. You can top each slice with more whipped topping (or real whipped cream!) and add a sprinkle of cinnamon or pumpkin pie spice if desired. You could also stick a mini graham cracker in the whipped topping for a fun decoration.

Can I adjust to mini pie crusts?

This filling would be great as mini pumpkin pies! I haven’t tested it yet to know how many it would make, but simply purchase the mini graham cracker crusts and add your filling!

Bite taken out of pumpkin pie with a graham cracker crust.

Storage

This pie will keep for up to three days in the fridge. I recommend keeping it in the original pie dish and covering it with plastic wrap. Only add topping to the slices as you serve them, and don’t store it with whipped cream on top.

More Pumpkin Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Slice of pumpkin pie made with graham cracker crust.
Print Pin
5 from 3 votes

Pumpkin Pie with Graham Cracker Crust

This no bake pie takes just 10 minutes to whip together! It's perfect for a last minute dessert, as long as you leave time for chilling.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Chill 3 hours
Total Time 3 hours 10 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 288kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 box instant vanilla pudding mix 3 ounces
  • 2 tablespoons brown sugar
  • 1 ½ teaspoons pumpkin pie spice
  • 1 cup half and half very cold
  • 1 cup pumpkin puree not pumpkin pie filling
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 tub whipped topping, thawed 8 ounces
  • 1 – 9-inch graham cracker crust
  • Whipped cream for garnish optional

Instructions

  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the pudding mix, brown sugar, and pumpkin pie spice.
  • Add the half and half and whisk until well combined, and the pudding starts to thicken – about two minutes.
  • Stir in the pumpkin and vanilla until combined.
  • Gently fold in the whipped topping to incorporate.
  • Finally, pour the mixture into the graham cracker crust and gently smooth the top.
  • Pop in the fridge for at least 3 hours before serving, or ideally overight.
  • Top slices with extra whipped topping if desired.

Notes

NOTE: I do not recommend using milk to make this pie. The higher fat content in the half and half helps the pudding to set better than milk. You can substitute the half and half for heavy cream if needed.

Nutrition

Serving: 1slice | Calories: 288kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 225mg | Potassium: 167mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 4895IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg

Dirty Chai Latte

I love the warm, comforting flavors of chai, but sometimes you just want an extra boost. Adding a quick shot of espresso turns this into a Dirty Chai Latte that will get you moving! Plus, if you’re a fan of both coffee and chai tea, combining the two just makes sense for a new drink recipe!

Dirty Chai Latte in clear glass mug.

Are you a coffee or tea person? I know sometimes there’s a big divide – and I realized I haven’t shared much on tea so let’s change that! This Chai Latte is a great introduction to tea since it also includes espresso. If you can’t get enough espresso in your life, I also love a good Peppermint Latte, and then of course, what pairs better than Hot Chocolate Toppers?

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Cheat with concentrate: No need to brew tea bags here! Picking up a carton of concentrate makes this super simple.
  • Coffee-shop-worthy froth: With an immersion blender, you will have amazing froth and perfectly blended flavors.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for dirty chai latte.
  • Chai latte concentrate – One brand I usually see in the store is Tazo but I honestly love the Oregan Chai Tea brand the most. Look around in the coffee or juice aisle for ready-to-drink teas to find this yummy drink!
  • Milk – I prefer whole milk, but even 2% will still add some nice froth.
  • Espresso – Brew your own in an espresso maker or simply brew an extra strong cup with your usual method, such as in a French press.
  • Honey – Use honey to add a little extra sweetness, depending on what chai you are starting with.
  • Spices – These are optional, but add a fun flair. The chai is of course already “spicy” so feel free to adjust as needed.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Milk – dairy-free? Go ahead and use a substitute here, but be aware that something like almond milk won’t give you much froth. Look for “barista blends” of non-dairy alternatives for extra frothing power. Cashew and oat milk are extra creamy options.
  • Honey – if you are making this drink vegan/vegetarian with different milk, make sure and leave this out or use maple syrup.
  • Coffee – No espresso machine? Many have “strong brew” options and there are also some delicious instant espresso options at the grocery store.

Variations

  • Temperature – serve hot or cold!
  • Late Night Cocktail – use decaf espresso and add a quick shot of Kahlúa to up the ante. Bailey’s would also be delicious.
  • Got the expertise to make your own? Feel free to use a homemade chai concentrate.

Equipment

I like to use an immersion blender to get really great froth. If you have a handheld milk frother that will also work, but sometimes it works better in each glass rather than the entire quantity at once. Adding everything to a blender will also work – but be sure and vent the lid and cover with a towel when blending hot liquids!

How to Make a Hot Dirty Chai Latte

This takes literally minutes to pull together! Start the espresso in the machine and heat up the rest of the ingredients and boom, you’re done.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 how to make a dirty chai latte.

STEP 1. Heat the drink. Add chai concentrate, milk, and honey to a small saucepan. Heat until almost boiling. (Image 1).

Tip: Don’t let the milk boil! This only takes a few minutes to heat up so stir often and don’t walk away. Boiling will change the taste and texture of the milk, and if it boils over will be a huge mess.

STEP 2. Add espresso. Pour the espresso evenly among 3 large mugs or glasses (Image 2).

Star anise on top of dirty chai latte.

STEP 3. Add froth. Froth in the pot with an immersion blender, or use a mini frother in each glass.

STEP 4. Spice it up. Add whole spices if using, and serve!

Dirty Chai Latte in clear glass mug.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Allow to fully cool. If you aren’t serving or drinking the entire pot full at once, pour into jars and let cool before adding a lid and storing in the fridge.
  • Don’t boil. You want to bring the milk and chai close to a boil, but not hit that point. Otherwise, your milk can scald or form a skin and no one wants that!

Recipe FAQs

Do I have to serve this chai latte hot?

Nope – it’s just as good cold if that’s what you enjoy! Rather than heating the milk and concentrate, just froth it and combine it with the espresso and ice. Stir and enjoy! Use coffee ice cubes instead of regular water ice cubes to not water down your drink.

What makes a latte “dirty”?

Adding a shot of espresso gives this a darker, brown color – almost as if it were dirty. Don’t let that name throw you off though!

Can this be frozen?

Absolutely! If your concentrate will go bad before you can drink it all, go ahead and freeze just that or the entire combined recipe. Choose a leak-proof container and leave headroom for expansion when freezing.

To serve, let thaw overnight, then gently heat on the stove until ready to drink. Then froth and pour into cups!

What to Serve with Dirty Chai Latte

I love this as a morning brunch pick-me-up, maybe served alongside some scones? An afternoon pick-me-up is also a great excuse to make this, and I think it’s fun to pair with some Pumpkin Streusel Muffins because they have the same spice profile.

Storage

Store leftovers in a lidded jar in the fridge for a couple days. You could also combine all the ingredients cold and keep in the fridge, then heat and froth at serving time.

Prefer iced lattes? Freeze leftovers in an ice cube tray and then use to chill your latte. As they melt, they won’t water down your glass!

More Coffee Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Dirty Chai Latte in clear glass mug.
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Dirty Chai Latte

I love the warm, comforting flavors of chai, but sometimes you just want an extra boost. Adding a quick shot of espresso turns this into a Dirty Chai Latte that will get you moving!
Course Drinks
Cuisine American
Prep Time 2 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 3 servings
Calories 136kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • Immersion Blender

Ingredients

  • 2 cups chai latte concentrate
  • 2 cups whole milk
  • 6 ounces espresso prepared
  • 1 tablespoon cinnamon
  • 3 star anise
  • 1 tablespoon honey optional

Instructions

  • Combine the latte concentrate, honey, and milk in a medium pot. Heat the mixture over medium heat while stirring until almost reaching a boil. Remove the pot from the heat.
  • Carefully blend the milk mixture with an immersion blender until foamy. No stick blender? Transfer to a countertop blender and pulse with the lid vented.
  • Split the mug of espresso among three large mugs. Then add the milk mixture on top.
  • Place a cinnamon stick and a star anise on the top of each drink, stir it in for a burst of flavor. This step is optional!

Notes

Do I have to use store-bought chai latte concentrate or can I make my own?
Store-bought is more than fine here but if you have the time and the expertise, you can totally make your own chai concentrate. 

Nutrition

Serving: 16oz | Calories: 136kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 75mg | Potassium: 397mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 274IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 235mg | Iron: 1mg

Bacon and Sausage Quiche

This Bacon and Sausage Quiche is a simple crustless recipe that uses items like sausage, bacon, and other simple ingredients that you may already have on hand!

Savory breakfast recipes are some of our favorites, and we think you’re also going to love these breakfast egg rolls if you love recipes like this quiche!

Slice of bacon and sausage quiche on a spatula above the whole quiche.

This quiche recipe brings a whole new meaning to eating your bacon and eggs in the morning for a hearty breakfast. It’s loaded with flavor and hearty enough with protein that will keep the kids full until lunchtime. Or, for an easy dinner idea, this quiche is meaty enough that it won’t even feel like a breakfast dish!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Enjoy any time of day: Whether you need a quiche recipe for brunch, weekend breakfast, or even a dinner idea… this recipe is perfect for ANY time of the day.
  • Crustless: Cutting out the crust, means that it’s fewer ingredients and fewer carbs.
  • Prep ahead of time: Although quick to whip up in the evening after work, feel free to shave off some time and prepare this in the morning, and bake it when you get home from work!

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for bacon and sausage quiche.
  • Cheddar cheese – When it comes to having shredded cheese in a recipe, you can buy pre-shredded in the store but when you shred your own, it doesn’t have the caking ingredient that prevents cheese from sticking together in the package, and that means your cheese won’t have the powdery texture. So if you’re able, it’s best to shred your own cheese.
  • Sausage – I use mild ground sausage but you can use hot and spicy if you prefer a “kick” to recipes like I like to use in this sausage and tortellini soup. Or you can also use baked sausage links if needed as a substitute in a pinch.
  • Milk – the type of milk used is up to you! Skim, 2%, whole, or even almond, soy, or coconut milk should work.
  • Salt – the amount of salt is up to you. Remember that bacon and sausage have a lot of salt already so you won’t want to overdo it, and you can always add salt but it’s harder to take it away.

How to Make This Bacon and Egg Quiche

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Before Cooking: Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

Steps 1-4 of how to make bacon and sausage quiche.

STEP 1. Brown ground sausage, drain and set aside.

STEP 2. In a mixing bowl, whisk eggs and egg whites. Add milk, salt, pepper, cheese, and cooked meats.

STEP 3. Pour mixture into greased pie pan and bake uncovered for 40 minutes.

STEP 4. Remove from oven, slice, and enjoy!

Cooked bacon and sausage quiche in pie plate.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Add veggies. If you’re looking to add some vegetables to this quiche recipe, that’s perfectly ok! Adding chopped spinach, celery, or carrots to this recipe is a great idea for sneaking in some vegetables.
  • Toppings. If you’re looking for more things to garnish this quiche with, a dollop of sour cream, parsley, or even a drizzle of syrup can add more flair to this recipe.
Bacon and sausage quiche sliced, and a close-up of the inside.

What to Serve with Quiche

If hosting a breakfast or brunch, serving different dishes with quiche may be a good idea, especially something simple like baked sausage patties. Or, if you’re simply wanting something else to serve with a delicious breakfast quiche at home, these recipes are delicious alongside this savory recipe:

Storage

If you have leftover quiche, allow it to fully cool and then cover with plastic wrap, or place in an airtight container and in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

More Breakfast Recipes You’ll Love

If you’re having this quiche for breakfast, then I think you’ll also love this easy breakfast casserole for another morning!

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Slice of bacon and sausage quiche on spatula.
Print Pin
4.15 from 7 votes

Bacon and Sausage Quiche

This bacon and sausage quiche is full of meaty and cheesy flavor. Easy to make, and hearty enough making it a filling breakfast or dinner recipe.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine French
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 262kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 4 slices cooked bacon crumbled
  • ½ pound sausage
  • 4 large eggs
  • 4 egg whites
  • ¾ cup milk
  • 2 teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ cup sharp cheddar cheese shredded
  • ¼ cup grated parmesan
  • salt to taste

Optional Add-Ins:

  • onions diced
  • bell peppers diced
  • tomatoes diced
  • broccoli finely chopped
  • ham diced
  • spinach chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Brown ground sausage, drain and set aside.
  • In mixing bowl, whisk eggs and egg whites. Add milk, salt, pepper, cheeses and cooked meats.
  • Pour mixture into greased pie pan and bake uncovered for 40 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving (⅙ recipe) | Calories: 262kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 167mg | Sodium: 462mg | Potassium: 217mg | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 295IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 106mg | Iron: 1.2mg

Brownies with Cream Cheese Frosting

These Brownies with Cream Cheese Frosting are made using a chocolate fudge pudding mix, and a few other ingredients that come together and pair perfectly with the creamy cream cheese frosting!

The brownie recipes you’ll find here are always easy, and this recipe is no exception. In a little over an hour, you’ll have a delicious dessert ready for you to enjoy.

Sliced brownies with cream cheese frosting on counter.

Ever since these strawberry brownies went viral online, I knew you loved brownies as much as I do. So since then, you’ve seen similar recipes like these chocolate peanut butter brownies, and these cornflake brownies appear here too, so I think you’re going to love them all just the same! Or if you love using cake mixes when making desserts, you’ll love these red velvet brownies too!

Have an Instant Pot? You may also love these Instant Pot brownies too!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Chocolate + Cream Cheese: Flavor combinations can make or break a recipe. In this case, the cool and creamy, sweet cream cheese frosting, combined with the chocolate flavor is the perfect combination.
  • Pudding Brownies: Did you know that if you add pudding mix to brownies, it can make them more moist and even softer? It’s true. You’ll love the addition of the mix to these.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes for this chocolatey brownie. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for homemade brownies with cream cheese frosting.
  • Butter – The unsalted butter will be used for the brownies and the salted butter will be used in the cream cheese frosting.
  • Flour – All-purpose flour is recommended for these brownies.
  • Cream Cheese – Since this needs to be softened, go ahead and sit this out so it has time to soften when it comes time to use it for the frosting.
  • Chocolate Chips – Using milk chocolate chips instead of semi-sweet should be ok, however, it will alter the taste of the brownies slightly.

How to Make Brownies with Cream Cheese

These fudgy brownies are made from scratch, instead of using a box mix. However, this recipe is still very easy to make!

This chocolate brownie and cream cheese frosting recipe is broken into 3 components:

  • make the brownies
  • allow brownies to cool
  • make and frost the brownies with frosting

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

How to Make Homemade Brownies

BEGIN: Set the oven to 350° and prepare an 8 x 8 baking pan by lining with parchment paper and clipping the sides down to the pan.

Steps 1-4 of how to make homemade brownies with cream cheese frosting.

STEP 1. In a microwave-safe bowl, add half of the chocolate chips and the butter. Microwave for 30 seconds; if the chocolate is not completely melted, stir and microwave for another 15 seconds. Continue to do this until the chocolate is completely melted and well combined with the butter. 

STEP 2. While the chocolate is cooling, mix sugars, vanilla, and eggs together in a large bowl for 3 to 5 minutes until smooth and not gritty. This will give you a fudgier consistency.

STEP 3. Add the melted chocolate mixture to the egg mixture and whisk to combine. 

STEP 4. Next add the flour, pudding mix, and salt.

Steps 5-8 for making homemade brownies.

STEP 5. Whisk until smooth; the batter will be thick. 

STEP 6. Add in the chocolate chips, and mix in.

STEP 7. Get the baking dish that was prepared earlier.

STEP 8. Pour batter in to baking dish and spread batter to the edges until brownie batter is level. Bake for 30-35 minutes until a toothpick comes out mostly clean. The less time you bake the more fudgy the brownies will be.

Completely cool brownies before frosting. 

How to Make Cream Cheese Frosting

Steps 9-12 for making cream cheese frosting to go on brownies.

STEP 9. In a large mixing bowl add the butter and cream cheese and cream until light and fluffy and pale in color. 

STEP 10. Add half of the powdered sugar to the cream cheese mixture and mix scraping the bowl as needed. 

STEP 11. Add the remaining powdered sugar, vanilla, half and half, and salt.

STEP 12. Mix until smooth. 

Steps 13-15 how to frosting brownies with cream cheese frosting.

STEP 13. Grab the fully-cooled brownies.

STEP 14. Spread the perfect finishing touch (frosting) evenly over cooled brownies.

Cut and serve the pan of brownies for a decadent dessert.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Allow to fully cool. Making sure that you allow the cake to completely cool before frosting is key or the frosting won’t turn out the way that it should.
  • Correct temperature. Butter, eggs, and cream are the key ingredients that should be at room temperature before making this recipe.
Bite taken out of brownie with cream cheese frosting.

Recipe FAQs

What is brownie frosting made of?

There are different types of frosting recipes that can work on brownies. Cream cheese frosting and buttercream frosting are the two most popular recipes.

How do you store brownies with frosting?

Depending on the type of frosting, some can be stored in the refrigerator or stored at room temperature. Brownies with cream cheese frosting should be refrigerated in an airtight container but they can sit out at room temperature for up to two hours.

🍽 What to Serve with This Brownie Recipe

Serving decadent brownies with a scoop of ice cream (a la mode) is common and serving your favorite flavor of ice cream with these cream cheese brownies would be a great idea.

More Dessert Recipes You’ll Love

If you love easy desserts like these fudgy chocolate brownies, then you’ll love all of our desserts. (Especially if you have an Instant Pot, try these brownies made in the Instant Pot.) Here are a few dessert recipes you don’t want to miss:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

A brownie with cream cheese frosting, tipped on it's side, in the middle of other brownies.
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Brownies with Cream Cheese Frosting

Homemade brownies with cream cheese frosting, use a pudding mix to make them moist and soft! The cool cream cheese frosting combined with chocolate is the perfect pairing!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Cooling Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 9 brownies
Calories 577kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

Brownies

  • ½ cup unsalted butter 1 stick
  • 6 ounces semi-sweet chocolate chips divided
  • ½ cup granulated sugar
  • ½ cup brown sugar
  • 3 eggs
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • 3.9 ounce box of chocolate fudge pudding mix mix only
  • ½ teaspoon salt

Frosting

  • 4 ounces cream cheese softened
  • ¼ cup salted butter ½ stick
  • 2 cups powdered sugar
  • 1 teaspoon half and half
  • ¼ teaspoon vanilla
  • ⅛ teaspoon salt a pinch

Instructions

For Brownies

  • Set the oven to 350° and prepare an 8 x 8 pan by lining with parchment paper and clipping the sides down to the pan.
  • In a microwave safe bowl, add half of the chocolate chips and the butter. Microwave for 30 seconds; if the chocolate is not completely melted, stir and microwave for another 15 seconds. Continue to do this until the chocolate is completely melted and well combined with the butter.
  • While the chocolate is cooling, mix sugars, vanilla, and eggs together in a large bowl for 3 to 5 minutes until smooth and not gritty. This will give you a fudgier consistency.
  • Add the chocolate mixture to the egg mixture and whisk to combine. Next add the flour, pudding mix, and salt. Whisk until smooth; the batter will be thick. 
  • Pour into the prepared pan.
  • Bake for 30-35 minutes until a toothpick comes out mostly clean. The less time you bake the more fudgy the brownies will be.
  • Completely cool brownies before frosting. 

For Frosting

  • In a large mixing bowl add the butter and cream cheese and cream until light and fluffy and pale in color. 
  • Add half of the powdered sugar to the bowl and mix scraping the bowl as needed. 
  • Add the remaining powdered sugar, vanilla, half and half, and salt. Mix until smooth. 
  • Spread frosting evenly over cooled brownies.
  • Cut and serve.

Notes

Storage: Brownies with cream cheese frosting should be refrigerated, although they can sit out at room temperature for up to two hours.

Nutrition

Serving: 1brownie | Calories: 577kcal | Carbohydrates: 77g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 109mg | Sodium: 446mg | Potassium: 204mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 65g | Vitamin A: 733IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg

No Bake Biscoff Pie

This Biscoff Pie recipe is a smooth and creamy, refrigerated pie that’s perfect for any time of year, especially during the summer months and during the holidays.

Pie recipes are great for entertaining, making for a Sunday afternoon treat, or making for a potluck. When they are easy recipes like this no-bake dessert, it’s a great one to keep in your back pocket for any time that you need it.

Slice of no bake Biscoff pie on white plate, sitting next to rest of pie.

This peanut butter pie is a similar, creamy, no-bake pie recipe, that is easy to make, along with this turtle pie, which has delicious flavors of caramel, chocolate, and cheesecake. This butterscotch pie recipe is another no-bake recipe that’s easy to make, with simple ingredients and is a must-make.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • No Bake Cookie Crust: If you know how delicious an Oreo crust is, then you can imagine how amazing a Biscoff pie crust is, with this Biscoff pie recipe! Then, if you have extra Biscoff cookies, make this Biscoff fudge recipe.
  • Make-ahead recipe: Since this pie recipe needs to chill, to thicken, it’s best to make this recipe ahead of time but that’s a great thing if you’re making it for an event, so it’s one less thing that you have to do. You can also make this no-bake pumpkin pie and allow it to set with this one.
  • Uses just a few ingredients: With only a few ingredients, it’s hard to believe that a pie can have tons of flavor but it does!
  • No Nuts: If you haven’t had Biscoff before, the Biscoff website states that its product does not include nuts. So if you love peanut butter pie but can’t have it, this is a great alternative.

Ingredients Needed

Labeled ingredients for no bake Biscoff pie.
  • Biscoff Crust – For full-on Biscoff flavor, you’ll want to use a Biscoff crust, although it’s not a must. If you don’t feel like making the crust, you can use an Oreo or graham cracker crust instead.
  • Biscoff Cookie Butter – You should be able to find this in the grocery store, next to the peanut butter.

How to Make Biscoff Pie

This pie recipe is broken into 3 components:

  • making the crust (unless you use a different, pre-made crust)
  • making the pie
  • allowing the pie to chill

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 of how to make Biscoff pie.

STEPS 1 & 2. In an electric mixer or with a hand mixer, beat the softened cream cheese and the Biscoff butter until smooth and creamy – scraping the sides and bottom of the bowl occasionally.

STEPS 3 & 4. Add the powdered sugar and beat until mixed together smoothly – again, scraping the sides and bottom of the bowl to make sure it is all incorporated.

Steps 5-8 of how to make Biscoff pie.

STEPS 5 & 6. Remove the bowl from the mixer and fold in the container of Cool Whip with a spatula.

STEPS 7 & 8. Transfer pie filling into the pie cracker crust and smooth out the top.

STEP 9. Cover the pie with plastic wrap, and chill in the refrigerator or freezer for 3 hours. Serve!

Tip: You can make this the day before you need it as well. Sitting in the refrigerator overnight will allow the pie to thicken more and the flavors to combine more.

If you put it in the freezer instead of the refrigerator, allow it to thaw for at least 10 minutes before trying to cut into it.

Biscoff pie in white pie plate.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Top with your favorites. We chose to top this no-bake Biscoff pie with more crushed Biscoff cookies. However, you can do the same, or use crushed Oreos, drizzle caramel, drizzle chocolate, or add dollops of whipped cream.
  • Softened Cream Cheese. Don’t forget to soften your cream cheese before you start making the pie. How to soften quickly: pour hot water into a drinking glass and allow it to sit for a couple of minutes. Pour the water out, quickly place the cream cheese in the glass, and turn the glass upside down. All to sit until the cream cheese has softened.
Slice of Biscoff pie on white plate, next to whole pie.

What to Serve with Biscoff Pie

Ice cream goes great with any pie; this recipe is no exception. But you can also top this pie with your favorite chopped candy bars, syrups, and much more!

A fork holding a bite of Biscoff pie.

Storage

Make sure to store this pie in the refrigerator when not actively serving. It should keep in the refrigerator for 3-5 days.

More Pie Recipes You’ll Love

If you love pies as much as we do, you’ll also love these easy pie recipes:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

No Bake Biscoff Pie on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 5 votes

No Bake Biscoff Pie

This no bake Biscoff pie is a creamy, chilled pie recipe that is quick to make and required refrigeration to thicken before serving. It's a pie that's a blend of delicous flavors that are delicious all year long.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Chill Time 3 hours
Total Time 3 hours 15 minutes
Servings 8 slices
Calories 469kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 Biscoff pie crust Biscoff pie crust recipe – or a 9-inch graham cracker crust
  • 8 ounces cream cheese
  • 1 cup Biscoff cookie butter
  • ¾ cup powdered sugar
  • 8 ounces Cool Whip

Instructions

  • In an electric mixer or with a hand mixer, beat the softened cream cheese and the Biscoff butter until smooth and creamy – scraping the sides and bottom of the bowl occasionally.
  • Add the powdered sugar and beat until mixed together smoothly – again, scraping the sides and bottom of the bowl to make sure it is all incorporated.
  • Remove the bowl from the mixer and fold in the container of Cool Whip with a spatula.
  • Transfer pie filling into the pie cracker crust and smooth out the top.
  • Cover the pie with plastic wrap, and chill in the refrigerator or freezer for 3 hours.

Notes

Since a few hours are required to allow the pie to “set” before serving, this is a great “make-ahead” recipe that you can make the day before to allow the flavors to fully combine. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1slice | Calories: 469kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 210mg | Potassium: 92mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 30g | Vitamin A: 431IU | Calcium: 64mg | Iron: 1mg

Lazy Cake

Lazy Cake is an easy, chocolate, no bake recipe, that chills in the refrigerator, and that uses simple ingredients, that doesn’t require any baking.

Cake recipes are some of our favorite dessert recipes, especially chocolate recipes like this one.

Lazy cake on a spatula, up above the rest of the pieces.

During the summer, it can be a great time to make easy no bake desserts. This ice cream sandwich cake and this Oreo dessert are two of our favorites to make without the oven.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses simple ingredients: Only common ingredients are used in this recipe! So you’ll more than likely have most, or all of these on hand.
  • Make-ahead recipe: It’s great when a recipe can be made ahead of time. Whether that’s for an event, so you can save your time later for last-minute needs, or just because you want to make it when you feel like it, rather than waiting until you have to make it.
  • Kid-Friendly: If your kiddos love chocolate desserts, then they will love all the chocolatey flavors in this recipe.

Ingredients Needed

As you can see below, the ingredients for this recipe are simple and you may even have everything on hand!

Labeled ingredients for lazy cake.

Substitutions

If you find that you have to switch some ingredients out, here are some suggestions that may help:

  • Graham Crackers – if you’d rather use graham crackers instead of animal crackers, you absolutely can.
  • Chocolate Chips – we prefer using milk chocolate chips instead of semi-sweet but if you prefer dark chocolate flavors, you can use those instead.

How to Make Lazy Cake

The process for this lazy cake is simple, however there are a few steps to follow to make sure this is a success for you!

This Lazy Cake recipe is broken into 3 components:

  • Mixing the cake batter
  • Chilling
  • Making ganache and chill again.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

How to Make the Cake Batter

Tip: Before beginning, line an 8-inch, square baking pan with parchment paper.

Cut parchment paper a little bigger than pan, and cut a slit that’s about 2-3 inches, in each corner, so it sits down in the baking pan easier.

Place a piece of tape (or use clips) on each side of the baking pan to hold the parchment paper in place.

Steps 1-4 of how to make lazy cake.

STEP 1. Melt butter over low-medium heat, until melted.

STEP 2. Add the cocoa and sugar, and then whisk together.

STEP 3. Then add in the peanut butter. Whisk until blended.

STEP 4. Next, add the milk, and cook over medium heat and let it come to a boil, whisking occasionally, and allowing it to cook for another 5 minutes, as long as the mixture as thickened.

.

Steps 5-8 of how to make lazy cake.

STEP 5. Remove from heat, add in vanilla (and a pinch of salt if desired), and stir to combine.

STEP 6 & 7. Crush the animal crackers to smaller pieces and then add them to the chocolate mixture and stir to combine.

STEP 8. Pour mixture in to prepared baking dish. Refrigerate for one hour.

How to Make the Ganache

Steps 9-12 for making lazy cake.

STEP 9. Place milk chocolate chips in glass bowl. Over low-medium heat, heat heavy cream in a sauce pan until it’s gently boils.

STEP 10. Pour hot heavy cream over chocolate chips and stir until combined.

STEP 11. Remove cake from refrigerator.

STEP 12. Pour ganache over cold lazy cake, sprinkle on more crushed animal crackers if desired, and place back in refrigerator for 2-3 hours or until it’s hard enough to cut.

Lazy cake on counter with parchment paper being pulled off of sides.

Tip: When slicing the cake, wipe your knife between each slice for clean cuts.

Lazy cake sliced in to 9 pieces.

Recipe FAQs

What is lazy cake make of?

Lazy cake is made of cocoa, peanut butter, sugar, butter, animal cookies (or graham crackers), and few other staple ingredients.

Where did lazy cake originated?

It has been said that lazy cake is from the middle east and Europe. However it is becoming more common in other areas.

What to Serve with Lazy Cake

Lazy cake is delicious alone but you can serve other items with it, such as a delicious ice cream flavor, like vanilla bean or mint chocolate chip.

Or, you may want to try drizzling a raspberry syrup on top for some extra pizzazz.

Slice of lazy cake, sitting next to whole cake.

Storage

It’s best to store the lazy cake in the refrigerator when not actively serving. This helps keep it from getting too soft.

Bite taken out of lazy cake.

More Cake Recipes You’ll Love

Love cake recipes like this one? Then you’ll love these other delicious cakes we have for you, especially this fun mini chocolate cake recipe, or this chocolate cake without eggs!!

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Slice of lazy cake being held by spatula.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Lazy Cake

This is called a "lazy cake" because there's no baking required! Just a few simple ingredients, and a delicious, chocolate, sweet, cool, cake is ready to enjoy!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Chill 3 hours
Total Time 3 hours 15 minutes
Servings 9 squares
Calories 616kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • ½ cup cocoa
  • 1 cup milk
  • 1 cup white granulated sugar
  • 1 cup butter 2 sticks
  • 1 Tablespoon vanilla
  • ⅓ cup peanut butter
  • 2 cups animal crackers or graham crackers (Plus a few extras for crushed garnish on top, if desired.)
  • pinch salt if desired, especially if used unsalted butter

Chocolate Ganache

  • 1 cup milk chocolate chips
  • ½ cup heavy whipping cream

Instructions

  • Line 8 inch square baking pan with parchment paper. Cut parchment paper a little bigger than pan, and cut a slit that’s about 2-3 inches, in each corner, so it sits down in the baking pan easier. Place a piece of tape (or use clips) on each side of the baking pan to hold the parchment paper in place.
  • Melt butter over low-medium heat, until melted.
  • Add the cocoa and sugar, and then whisk together.
  • Then add in the peanut butter. Whisk until blended.
  • Next, add the milk, and cook over medium heat and let it come to a boil, whisking occasionally, and allowing it to cook for another 5 minutes, as long as the mixture as thickened.
  • Remove from heat, add in vanilla (and a pinch of salt if desired), and stir to combine.
  • Chop the animal crackers in to smaller pieces (not crush in to crumbs) and add them to the chocolate batter, and then stir to combine.
  • Pour mixture in to prepared baking dish. Refrigerate for one hour.

Ganache

  • Place milk chocolate chips in glass bowl.
    Over low-medium heat, heat heavy cream in a sauce pan until it’s gently boils.
    Pour hot heavy cream over chocolate chips and stir until combined.
  • Pour ganache over cold lazy cake, sprinkle on more crushed animal crackers if desired, and place back in refrigerator for 2-3 hours or until it’s hard enough to cut.

Notes

Make sure to store any leftover lazy cake in the refrigerator when not actively serving, or it can get too soft. It’s best served cold.

Nutrition

Serving: 1slice | Calories: 616kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 23g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 72mg | Sodium: 350mg | Potassium: 299mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 45g | Vitamin A: 869IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 94mg | Iron: 2mg

French Bread Pizza

Feel like trying something a little different from classic pizza? Then the French Bread Pizza might be perfect.

This delightful dish is a perfect fusion of crispy French bread and gooey cheese, topped with a rich tomato sauce, and your favorite pizza toppings. It’s a simple easy meal, customizable, and deliciously satisfying for an easy dinner or easy lunch idea. 

Two pieces of french bread pizza on baking sheet.

Whether you’re a busy parent looking for a quick meal option or a pizza lover seeking a new twist on a classic favorite, this homemade French Bread Pizza recipe is your ticket to a delicious meal. Then, keep this bagel pizza and this Texas toast pizza in mind for the next pizza recipe you try!

Or, you could have a go at Pizza Monkey Bread for a brilliant tear-and-share option with some pasta. And maybe you didn’t grow up making French bread pizza and are instead nostalgic for School Lunch Pizza?

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Loads of variations: Just like with any pizza recipe, you can change the toppings to suit your tastes and everyone gets what they like.
  • Make-ahead recipe: Make the basics before you are ready to bake them and just put everything together for a quick lunch.
  • Ready in only 20 minutes: With a little prep and a short cooking time, this delicious recipe will be ready in less than 20 minutes. Perfect for a last-minute pizza night

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Ingredients for french bread pizza.
  • Bread – French or Italian bread or baguette is the best option for this type of pizza bread as it is crispy on the outside and soft on the inside. Buy two so you can also make this cheesy pull-apart bread recipe too!
  • Cheese – You can’t make the best pizza without mozzarella and this French bread pizza is no different.
  • Sauce – Pizza sauce is the other must-have ingredient and also means the pizza bread is very easy to make. 

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Bread: If you can’t find French bread or baguette, ciabatta is a great alternative due to its similar texture and chew. For a healthier twist, you can opt for whole-grain or multigrain bread.
  • Cheese: If mozzarella isn’t available or if you want to try something different, provolone or Monterey Jack cheese would make a good substitute. For a vegan option, use a plant-based cheese of your choice.
  • Sauce: In the absence of pizza sauce, marinara or a simple tomato sauce seasoned with Italian herbs would work just as well. For a change of pace, try using pesto or white garlic sauce as a base.

Variations

Don’t limit your creativity to what you’d usually find on a pizza. If you’re looking for a lighter, vegetarian version, consider swapping the meat for a colorful array of bell peppers, sweet corn, and caramelized onions. 

Those who love seafood might want to top their pizza with anchovies, capers, and fresh arugula after baking. If you’re after a gourmet twist, a sprinkle of blue cheese, pear slices, and a drizzle of balsamic glaze would make a tantalizing combination. Remember, the sky’s the limit when you’re making your own pizza!

How to Make French Bread Pizza

This pizza bread is broken into 2 components:

  • Prepare the bread
  • Add the toppings and cook

Some recipes tend to saute the green peppers first to make them a bit softer but we like them crunchy so I add them raw. The choice is up to you!

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Mix the garlic butter. Combine melted butter with garlic powder.

STEP 2: Cut the bread and coat it then cook. Slice the bread in half lengthwise, then generously coat it with garlic butter. Bake it at 450 degrees for 4 minutes until golden and fragrant. (Image 1&2)

Steps 1-4 of image collage of making french bread pizza.

STEP 3: Add the pizza sauce. Spread approximately 1 ½ cups of pizza/marinara sauce on top (or slightly less than a 14 ounce jar, saving the remainder for dipping). (Image 3)

STEP 4: Add the cheese and toppings. Top it off with some delicious cheese and your favorite toppings for the perfect finishing touch. Toppings can include: pepperoni slices, fresh mozzarella, Italian sausage, and pre-shredded cheese. Top with parmesan cheese or red pepper flakes. (Image 4 & 5)

French bread pizzas with toppings, ready for baking.

STEP 5: Cook and serve. Preheat the oven to 450 degrees and bake for 6-7 minutes on a large baking sheet, or until the cheese has melted and turned a delicious golden brown. For an extra touch, consider broiling for a minute to enhance the flavors.

Two different French bread pizzas on baking sheets.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Pre-toast the bread: Before adding the toppings, it’s a good idea to toast the bread a little first. This will help to keep it from getting too soggy from the sauce.
  • Customize your toppings: This is your pizza, so feel free to get creative with your toppings. Don’t feel like you need to stick to the traditional family’s favorite toppings. Think outside the box!
  • Use fresh ingredients: The fresher your ingredients, the better your French Bread Pizza will taste. Nothing beats the taste of fresh basil, tomatoes, or mozzarella cheese.
  • Watch the oven: The pizza can go from perfectly cooked to burned in a matter of minutes. Keep a close eye on it, especially in the final stages of baking.
  • Serve immediately: French Bread Pizza is best served immediately while the cheese is still hot and gooey. If you need to save some for later, it’s best reheated in an oven or toaster oven to keep the bread crispy.
  • Add a salad: Pair your pizza with a simple side salad for a complete meal. The crisp, fresh salad contrasts nicely with the rich, hearty pizza.
Pepperoni French bread pizza slices.

Recipe FAQs

How do you keep French bread pizza from getting soggy?

A couple of steps can help prevent your French Bread Pizza from turning soggy. First, ensure you pre-toast your bread before adding the sauce and toppings. This creates a barrier that keeps the sauce from seeping into the bread. Additionally, go easy on the sauce. Too much can make the bread soggy.

Can I make French Bread Pizza ahead of time?

Yes, you can assemble your French Bread Pizza ahead of time, but it’s recommended to add the toppings and bake just before you’re ready to serve. This will ensure the french bread loaf
 remains crisp and the toppings fresh.

How can I make a vegan French Bread Pizza?

Substitute mozzarella with plant-based cheese and ensure your bread and sauce are vegan-friendly. You can top your pizza with a variety of vegetables, and for extra protein, add some plant-based meat substitutes.

How do you make homemade pizza sauce?

Creating homemade pizza sauce is straightforward and allows you to control the flavor profile to suit your tastes. Start with a can of crushed tomatoes. Sauté minced garlic in olive oil
 until fragrant, then add the tomatoes. Season with salt, pepper, oregano, and a pinch of sugar to balance the acidity. Let it simmer on low heat for 15-20 minutes to meld the flavors. Cool it before use on your French Bread Pizza. If you prefer a smoother sauce, you can blend it until it reaches your desired consistency.

Sliced French bread pizza slices on wooden cutting board with meat and vegetable toppings.

What to Serve with French Bread Pizza

French Bread Pizza pairs wonderfully with a wide variety of sides. Consider serving it with a crisp Caesar salad, tangy coleslaw, or a fresh Greek salad. Steamed vegetables or roasted Brussels Sprouts can also add a nutritious touch to your meal. For a more indulgent side, try some garlic knots, focaccia bread, or cheese-stuffed breadsticks. 

And of course, don’t forget a cold drink like iced tea, soda, or a glass of your favorite wine. Remember, the best accompaniment to any meal is the company of loved ones, so gather around the table and enjoy!

Mixture of different types of French bread pizza on wooden pizza cutting board.

Storage

Storing leftover French Bread Pizza is simple and can extend your enjoyment of this delicious meal. Allow the pizza to cool completely, then place it in an airtight container. Store it in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. 

You can also freeze the leftover pizza for longer storage – just be sure to wrap it tightly in plastic wrap or place it in a freezer bag before freezing to preserve its quality. To reheat, thaw in the refrigerator if frozen, then warm in a preheated oven until heated through, which will help maintain the crispness of the bread.

Slice of French bread pizza dipping in to small bowl of marinara sauce.

More Recipes You’ll Love

Once you make French Bread Pizza, you’ll get the urge to try more French-inspired recipes, I just know it! Here are a few suggestions to help you out.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

French bread pizza, sliced on wooden cutting board.
Print Pin
5 from 6 votes

French Bread Pizza

Using French bread to make the pizza crust, with these steps will ensure you have a delicious, crispy crust that you can customize with your favorite toppings.
Course Appetizer, Dinner, Lunch, Main Course, Side Dish
Cuisine American, Italian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 14 pieces
Calories 210kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 4 Tablespoons butter
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 loaf french bread
  • 14 ounces pizza sauce You more than likely won't use all of this but you can use the extra sauce for dipping.
  • 4 cups shredded mozzarella

Toppings Used in This Recipe – Amounts Vary Based on Preference

  • pepperoni cut in to fourths to make triangles
  • canadian bacon cut in to small triangles
  • "meat lovers" cooked bacon and sausage crumbles found in the frozen section (warmed in microwave before adding to pizza)
  • black olives sliced
  • green pepper
  • Italian dressing seasoning packet optional for pizza topping flavor

Instructions

  • Melt butter and garlic powder together in the microwave.
  • Cut bread in half, lengthwise and brush on melted garlic butter on to each slice of bread. (You may not use all of this and you can set aside any remaining to use later.)
  • Bake at 450 for 4 minutes. This is key to keeping the bread toasty instead of getting soggy.
  • Top baked bread with about 1 ½ cups of pizza sauce – dividing the sauce between the two. (This will more than likely be little less than a 14 ounce jar of pasta sauce, and you can save the rest for dipping.)
  • Top each piece of sauced bread with 2 cups of cheese and favorite toppings.
    (We did one half of bread with cheese and pepperoni and the other half with the remaining topping ingredients listed above.)
  • Bake at 450 for 6-7 minutes or until cheese has melted and is a nice golden brown. TIP: For a golden brown cheese, you may want to turn the oven to "broil" and watch carefully as it can turn golden brown, quickly!
  • If desired, sprinkle on a little of the Italian dressing seasoning packet for added flavor.
  • Slice french bread in to 1-2 inch pieces.
  • Warm and use any leftover pizza sauce as marinara sauce for dipping the slices.

Nutrition

Serving: 3pieces | Calories: 210kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 533mg | Potassium: 145mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 439IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 182mg | Iron: 2mg

Chicken Caprese Sandwich

This recipe for a Chicken Caprese Sandwich is made of deliciously seasoned chicken breast, fresh tomatoes, Ciabatta rolls, balsamic reduction, fresh basil leaves, and slices of fresh mozzarella cheese. It’s a sandwich recipe that’s perfect for the summer months and you can get the ingredients at almost any grocery store.

Chicken Caprese Sandwich on white plate, with balsamic dripping on to plate.

A delicious, traditional Caprese salad is perfect during the summer and is made up of mozzarella, tomatoes, and fresh basil. It’s a cool dish that has a ton of flavor, even with a few ingredients.

So with my love of Caprese salads, I loved the idea of turning it in to a sandwich with this chicken sandwich recipe. Now if you’re not a fan of chicken, you’ll also love this Caprese wrap that doesn’t use any meat.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses simple ingredients: Although a Caprese sandwich sounds fancy, you can usually find the ingredients at most grocery stores.
  • Fancy and Simple: Planning on making a lunch or dinner to impress? This sandwich is perfect for that but it’s also simple enough to make for a quick lunch just for you!
  • Ready in only 20 minutes: Talk about a quick and easy dinner idea! This recipe, from start to finish, takes less than 30 minutes.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below for this caprese sandwich recipe with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients on white counter for caprese sandwich.
  • Mozzarella – You can find the fresh mozzarella in the shape of a ball, and you’ll want to slice that in to thick slices for your caprese sandwich.
  • Chicken – Make sure to choose boneless, skinless, chicken breasts for this recipe. We use these in our chicken club sandwich as well and we feel it’s the best cut of meat for a juicy, tender sandwich.
  • Pesto Sauce – You can make homemade pesto sauce recipe but we prefer using store-bought pesto.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Bread – Ciabatta bread is best for this sandwich but that doesn’t mean it’s the only kind you can use. If you choose use different types of slices of bread, it’s best to make sure that you choose a thicker bread.
  • Basil – if you can’t find fresh basil, it’s ok to use dried but it won’t be nearly as good as fresh!
  • Skipping the Balsamic – I’m not a fan of balsamic vinegar. So I skip this when I make a sandwich for myself. However, I know how popular it is for caprese recipes, and all of my friends and family love it, so I figured you would too. However, if you don’t like it as much, you can easily skip that part.

How to Make This Caprese Chicken Sandwich

With this type of sandwich, it’s best to assemble it right before enjoying it. However, you can make the chicken ahead of time, so it’s quick to assemble when the time comes to eat.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 of how to make caprese chicken sandwiches.

STEP 1. Season the chicken. Sprinkle the chicken breasts with salt, pepper, and garlic powder. (The amounts can vary based on taste preference.)

STEP 2. Oil. Heat cooking oil over medium-high heat.

STEP 3. Raw chicken. Place seasoned chicken into the pan.

STEP 4. Cook chicken. Brown chicken on each side, flipping once, until chicken is cooked through; about 4-5 min on each side until golden brown, and/or until the internal temperature is checked with a meat thermometer and it has reached 165 degrees F.

Cooked chicken covered in pesto sauce, in white bowl.

Coat in Pesto. Place the cooked chicken in a bowl and toss with the pesto sauce.

Image collage of steps 5-8 of how to make chicken caprese sandwich.

STEP 5. Add chicken. Place pesto-covered chicken, on to a bottom piece of Ciabatta bun.

STEP 6. Mozzarella. Next, add on mozzarella slices on top of chicken.

STEP 7. Balsamic and Basil. Layer on balsamic and basil, on top of mozzarella.

STEP 8. Tomato. Lastly, adding juicy tomatoes on top and add top bun.

Close up of caprese chicken sandwich.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Leftover chicken. This is a fantastic way to use leftover chicken too!
  • Tomato Slices. Using fresh garden tomatoes for this recipe are superb. However, I know not everyone has a garden. This is a great reason to stock up on tomatoes at the farmer’s market, or at least during peak season at the grocery store. However, do not refrigerate your tomatoes. This causes them to lose flavor.

Recipe FAQs

What is a Caprese sandwich made of?

All Caprese sandwiches should have mozzarella, fresh basil, and tomato. Adding a protein or a drizzle of balsamic is common too.

What goes well with Caprese sandwich?

A pasta salad recipe pairs perfectly with a Caprese sandwich, as well as carrot sticks and jalapeno ranch dip or even a honey lime fruit salad.

Are Caprese sandwiches healthy?

When compared to sandwiches such as a fried chicken sandwich, yes, they can be considered healthy. However if “healthy” looks like “low-carb” to you, then using ciabatta bread for this sandwich would not be a good choice.

Chicken caprese sandwich sliced in half.

Storage

If there are leftovers from this sandwich, it’s best to store the toppings separately in the refrigerator, in an airtight container, and then assemble before serving, so the bread does not get soggy and so you can reheat the chicken when ready to enjoy.

More Sandwich Recipes You’ll Love

If you love sandwich recipes, then you’ll love these other recipes:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Chicken Caprese Sandwich on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Chicken Caprese Sandwich

Chicken Caprese Sandwich: Fresh mozzarella, basil, tomatoes, and bread make up this delicious grilled cheese recipe. This Italian take on the American classic is so delicious and an easy lunch recipe.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American, Italian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 sandwiches
Calories 568kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 pound Boneless Skinless Chicken Breast 
  • 2 Tablespoon cooking oil
  • pinch salt -/+ based on taste preference
  • pinch black pepper -/+ based on taste preference
  • ½ teaspoon garlic pepper Or -/+ based on preference.
  • 4 Tablespoons pesto sauce
  • 4 Ciabatta buns
  • 8 slices fresh Mozzarella
  • fresh basil leaves
  • 2 Tablespoons Balsamic reduction
  • 1 large fresh tomato

Instructions

  • Sprinkle salt, pepper, and garlic on each side of the chicken breast.
  • Heat cooking oil over medium high heat.
  • Place seasoned chicken into the pan. Brown chicken on each side, flipping once, until chicken is cooked through; about 4-5 min on each side.
  • Place the cooked chicken in a bowl and toss with the pesto sauce.

Assemble the Sandwich

  • Add the chicken breast to the bun. Then put the fresh mozzarella on top of the chicken. Sprinkle the mozzarella with salt and pepper to help balance the sweet from the balsamic. 
  • Then add as much basil and balsamic as you would like.
  • Lastly add the tomato slice and sprinkle with salt and pepper if desired. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 568kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 43g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 119mg | Sodium: 904mg | Potassium: 570mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1099IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 321mg | Iron: 1mg

30 Ground Beef Dinner Ideas

Ground beef is one of the unsung heroes of a family dinner recipe. It is easy to get, easy to cook, and with just a few ingredients you can turn it into something completely delicious. If you have some ground beef in the freezer, you are on your way to making an amazing meal with this collection of 30 Ground Beef Dinner Ideas.

Ground beef is economical for the budget-minded cook. It is versatile; there are so many dishes you can make with it!

From the easiest cheeseburger sliders to comforting hamburger hash brown casseroles; ground beef is a great source of protein, and it makes delicious meals that everyone will enjoy. You might want to save these recipes to your Pinterest easy dinner board.

Beef and cheese burrito

Beef Burritos

This recipe makes super cheesy beef burritos with plenty of salsa in the fold. Your family will love this for a fast and filling ground beef meal. Serve with rice or Mexican street corn.

Air fryer burgers

Air Fryer Burgers

Bring big burger flavor to the table without firing up the grill. This recipe makes for a fast family meal with ground beef that you can make on a busy weeknight, or anytime the craving for a good burger hits.

burger sliders

Cheeseburger Sliders

It’s no secret that we love hamburger recipes around here. But when you season the Hawaiian buns that go with them, it takes sliders to a whole new level.

french onion beef casserole scooped up out of white dish

French Onion Beef Casserole

This casserole is loaded with great flavors. Adding French onion and ground beef to a casserole is an easy recipe for a hearty family meal. Serve with bread and a veggie for an easy dinner with ground beef.

Side view of blue cheese burger on pretzel bun, with lettuce leaf, sitting next to french fries.

Blue Cheese Burgers with Pretzel Buns

Upgrade burger night with tangy blue cheese! This recipe tastes like it came from a trendy burger joint.

Syrup dripping down top of waffle burger

Waffle Burger

Everyone can make a burger out of some ground beef, right? Add some flair and make a burger that uses waffles instead of buns!

Spoonful of beef stroganoff

Easy Beef Stroganoff Recipe

Bring comfort food to the dinner table with this easy dish. Noodles, ground beef, and a tasty gravy make this meal filling and delicious!

A fork holding a bite of fried spaghetti, over a plate of it, next to a piece of garlic toast.

Fried Spaghetti

Although fried spaghetti uses leftover spaghetti, this recipe is so delicious that you may want to make a batch of spaghetti just so you can fry it!

Fork holding a bite of hamburger hashbrown casserole.

Hamburger Hash Brown Casserole

Grab some frozen beef and a bag of hash browns to make this really simple casserole to make this easy and hearty dinner. Serve with a simple salad like this old-fashioned pea salad.

Electric skillet burgers on a bun with lettuce and cheese and waffle fries.

Electric Skillet Hamburgers

This recipe takes the mess out of frying burgers indoors thanks to the lid on your electric skillet. Make these burgers unique every time you serve them by mixing up the toppings.

Taco pasta ready to eat, in skillet with a wooden spoon.

Taco Pasta

Taco night has never been more delicious! All the flavors of tacos, in skillet form.

One serving of cowboy stew in white bowl, sitting on wooden pot holder.

Cowboy Stew

Three kinds of meat; bacon, hamburger, and kielbasa make this stew hearty. It has plenty of veggies to make it wholesome too for a fantastic dinner everyone will love.

Oven baked hamburgers with cheese and sesame seed bun

How to Cook Burgers in the Oven

Did you know that you can make the best burgers in the oven? This easy recipe turns out perfectly every time for a satisfyingly simple meal idea.

Biscuit and cheeseburger casserole on spatula

Cheeseburger Casserole

Taking everyone’s favorite cheeseburger recipe and turning it in to a casserole. This recipe uses simple ingredients and is so full of flavor that kids and adults love.

Swedish meatballs and sauce top cooked egg noodles on a white plate

Easy Swedish Meatballs

Skip a trip to Ikea; this recipe makes the best Swedish meatballs. Serve these over egg noodles or mashed potatoes for a really creamy dinner that pairs well with crusty bread and a veggie for a wholesome and easy meal idea with ground beef.

smoked ground beef burgers on a seeded bun with tomato and pickle. Served with fries

Smoked Burgers

Pop some ground beef patties on the smoker for an hour and you are going to have the best burger night ever. Smoky meat is always delicious paired with a classic side like Amish Potato Salad.

Chili in small white bowl.

Simple Chili Recipe

It’s hard to believe that this chili recipe uses just a few simple ingredients and that it’s so good! But it is! This chili base allows each person to add ingredients and their favorite toppings to make it the best!

Tortilla chip scooping Velveeta Rotel dip out of bowl.

Rotel Dip

Cheese, ground beef, and Rotel tomatoes come together easily to make a tasty dip. Chances are, you might want to make a meal out of this; it is that good!

burgers moved away from direct flame

How to Grill Frozen Burgers

If you forgot to defrost meat for dinner tonight, no worries. These burgers are frozen at the start but are perfect by the time they are finished.

Lasagna soup in small white bowl, with a dollop of ricotta cheese on top.

Easy Lasagna Soup

Italian night just got a lot easier, and it’s in soup form! This lasagna soup is easy to make and is wonderful on a cold winter night.

Two bowls of goulash sit alongside a crock pot full of the same rich, hearty soup brimming with beef, vegetables and noodles

Crock Pot Goulash

Grab some simple ingredients like veggies, noodles, and ground beef to make this easy and delicious Goulash that cooks while you are at work for a warm welcome when you get home.

Burger with nacho cheese, onion and pickle on bun

Stove Top Burgers

Get a great ground beef meal ready without firing up the grill. This recipe makes it so easy to fry the perfect juicy burger on your stovetop.

Instant pot chili mac recipe

Instant Pot Chili Mac

Let your instant pot make short work of dinner tonight. This recipe has noodles, beef, and kidney beans for a really delicious and nutritious family dinner idea that is ready in just a few moments.

A Juicy Lucy burger on a plate cut in half to reveal the cheese inside.

Juicy Lucy Burgers

Cheeseburgers are always a good idea for a ground beef dinner. This recipe tucks melty cheese inside the patty for a burger that is bursting with cheesy flavors!

Instant pot cheeseburger macaroni. Noodles with ground beef

Cheeseburger Macaroni

This easy instant pot recipe tastes even better than the iconic box mix. Pop some wholesome, simple ingredients like cheese, ground beef, and noodles for a fast and filling family-friendly meal.

Frito Chili Pie Recipe

Frito Chili Pie

If you love Chili, you’re going to love having it in chili pie form. This is a thicker recipe, that pours on top of Fritos and then topped with your favorite toppings.

Sloppy joey sliders with cheese

Sloppy Joe Sliders

Sloppy joe sliders are an easy dinner idea that can also serve as an appetizer for a party at dinnertime. The cheese and buttery seasoned bun make these sliders a must for dinner!

Taco Soup

Bring the bold flavors of tacos to an easy-to-make taco soup. This recipe uses simple pantry staples to make a hearty soup that has a great flavor and can feed a crowd.

Donut Burger with Cheese and Bacon

Buttery Glazed Donut Burgers

This recipe is epic. Bring decadent glazed donuts to burger night for an incredibly indulgent meal that beats any drive-thru offering!

Hot taco dip being lifted out of baking dish with a chip.

Hot Taco Dip

This dip has all of the flavors of tacos in a cheesy dip. It is so hearty and delicious that you can pair some chips with this and have a very yummy meal the family will love on those nights you just want something easy.

Which of these easy ground beef dinner ideas would your family like? If you try any of these recipes I hope you will come back and leave a comment to let me know what you thought!

Indoor Picnic Food Ideas

Are you looking for a way to surprise someone with a special afternoon but you aren’t sure what to do?

How about having an indoor picnic? On a wet day, this is a perfect way to make a meal special for kids or adults.

This is also a budget-friendly date idea that is sure to impress your spouse on a date night at home. I have gathered some of my favorite indoor picnic food ideas to share with you and make sure to also see the list of picnic food ideas for couples and these ideas for a picnic set up.

Collage of indoor picnic food ideas.

From the best tuna salad ever to an easy layered taco dip that pairs perfectly with tortilla chips. I know you are going to find a few recipes to try out for your own indoor picnic, or even ways to make food look fun.

You might want to pin these ideas to your Pinterest picnic board.

Italian sliders with meat, cheese and peppers

Italian Sliders on Hawaiian Rolls

These little sliders have so much flavor thanks to the mixture of meat and cheese with banana peppers! Make these for the perfect portion of finger food to share over lunch or dinner.

Reuben dip in white pie dish, and a spoon scooping out a serving.

Reuben Dip

If you like a good Reuben sandwich, then you are going to love this dip! Serve it with crusty rye bread for the perfect indoor picnic food.

Chicken caprese sandwich sliced in half.

Caprese Chicken Sandwich

This Caprese chicken sandwich makes for perfect picnic food. This sandwich is really great when served with a bowl of soup, or a glass of wine.

ham and cheese on a bun with pasta in a bowl

Hot and Ham Cheese Sandwiches

You can’t go wrong with a classic like hot ham and cheese! This recipe is easy and makes for perfect indoor picnic food, paired with chips or a side salad.

Peanut Butter and Jelly

An indoor picnic doesn’t have to be fancy; a classic like pb&j and good conversation is all you need to make a great combo.

fried peanut butter and jelly sandwich on a white plate

Fried Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwiches

Peanut butter and jelly sandwiches are always a good idea. This recipe warms them up with buttery toasted bread for the unique and yummy picnic option.

Chicken grilled cheese

Chicken Grilled Cheese

Melty cheese and chicken are perfect partners for an easy lunch to share. Add your favorite cheeses to make this sandwich deliciously different.

shrimp Macaroni salad in a bowl

Shrimp Macaroni Salad

Bring your macaroni salad up a step by adding shrimp. This is such a delicious option for creamy and filling picnic food.

Tuna salad sandwiches stacked up on a white plate

Tuna Salad Sandwiches

After one bite, you are going to agree these are the best tuna salad sandwiches ever. This classic picnic food always hits the spot while being budget-friendly.

Chopped Italian salad in a bowl

Italian Chopped Salad

Pasta, lettuce, and all the fixings like bacon and blue cheese come together to make the best salad. I know you will love the honey mustard dressing as much as I do.

Taco Dip in a white casserole dish

Taco Layer Dip

Who could resist this tasty taco dip? Offer it with tortilla chips for an easy indoor picnic offering that everyone will love.

Air fryer pigs in a blanket

Air Fryer Pigs in a Blanket

Wrap little sausages in dough and pop them in the air fryer for classic finger food. Serve these with some smoked queso or some pretzel cheese dip.

M&M candy coated peanut butter cream cheese ball with pretzels

Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball

Cream cheese, peanut butter and M&M’s come together to make the best dessert cheese ball for your indoor picnic. I know you are going to love this recipe.

bacon ranch pasta in gray bowl

Bacon Ranch Pasta Salad

This creamy pasta is perfect for a picnic! With all the flavors of cheese, bacon, and creaminess, it’s hard to beat!

Bruschetta Recipe

The BEST Bruschetta

A classy appetizer or the perfect nibble for an indoor picnic? We’re going to go with BOTH! This bruschetta is not only easy to make but the fresh flavors are incredible.

Fried Bologna and Egg Sandwich, cut in half, sitting on white plate

Fried Bologna and Egg Sandwich

It’s a Southern classic but also a great idea for a picnic. Eggs aren’t just for breakfast anymore either. This warm bologna and egg sandwich is a great sandwich idea for your picnic.

Honey lime fruit salad in white bowl.

Honey Lime Fruit Salad

Fresh fruit is not only a great idea for a picnic but the honey and lime flavors in this fruit salad take a common dish to the next level.

no bake oreo dip in white bowl with dippers around

Oreo Dip

What about dessert? This no-bake Oreo dip makes the dessert portion of your picnic something to remember! Dip fruit or your favorite cookies into this smooth and creamy dip.

shortcake characuterie with berries, cookies and whipped cream on a board

Shortcake Charcuterie by Sugar and Soul

This shortcake board is the perfect dessert for your indoor picnic. Add assorted berries and plenty of cookies for an experience.

Old fashioned ham salad sandwiches on wooden cutting board.

Ham Salad

A cool sandwich on a hot summer day hits the spot. But even if the picnic is inside, a cool sandwich may just be what you need to round out the meal.

Which of these recipes would you like to serve at your indoor picnic? Leave a comment and let me know if you have any suggestions for the perfect picnic food.

Tips for an Indoor Picnic:

If you’re hosting an indoor picnic, here are some tips to help make it a success!

  • Offer a variety of food and drinks. These ice cubes with fruit and herbs is a beautiful way to make drinks fun too! Variety is always nice so think something salty, something crunchy, a sweet, something to snack on in between courses.
  • Set the mood with music, lighting, and activities.
  • Wear comfortable clothes and offer comfortable seating.
  • Don’t forget to relax and have fun.

Love These Recipe Collections?

Here are more collections we’ve created for you so you can browse and find some of the best recipes:

Spicy Crackers Recipe

Spicy Crackers Recipe: Seasoning saltine crackers with spices that are full of flavor, is so easy and they’re the perfect snack recipe for the holidays or just to snack on during game night!

Seasoned, spicy, saltine crackers in white bowl.

When it comes to snack recipes, keeping things simple is key or then it just doesn’t feel like a “snack,” am I right?

These spicy saltine crackers are not only easy but they are ready to eat in about an hour.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Make-ahead recipe: Did you know that you can make this recipe in advance if you want to? It’s true! Make them in advance so it’s one less thing you have to do when entertaining.
  • No Bake Recipe – no oven required, and it’s a simple mix-and-dry recipe!

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for spicy ranch crackers.
  • Oil – We use canola oil for this recipe but don’t go out and buy it just because we say so. If you have others on hand, it’s ok to use them too. See the substitutions section below for tips.
  • Garlic Pepper – You should be able to find garlic pepper in the spice aisle, and we love to use Lawry’s but any brand will do.
  • Ranch Seasoning – if you plan to make these a lot, you can usually find the bulk ranch dressing seasoning in the plastic jars in the store. Otherwise, the small individual packets will do.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Oil – if you have vegetable oil on hand, this can be used instead of canola oil. You can also try olive oil but we’ve found that it can give the crackers more of a bitter taste if you don’t use a higher quality olive oil.
  • Crackers – These can be made with Oyster crackers or saltines! But I prefer the saltines for easier grab-and-go snaking.

How to Make Spicy Crackers

This seasoned crackers recipe is broken into 2 components:

  • Seasoning the crackers
  • Allowing the crackers to dry

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Place crackers in a large bowl or container. One that’s large enough for gently stirring to mix the oil/seasonings.

Steps for how to make spicy ranch crackers.

Step 1. In a separate bowl, add in oil, ranch seasoning, garlic pepper & red pepper.

Step 2. With a spoon, mix oil and seasonings until evenly combined.

Step 3. Pour mixture over crackers and toss every 15 minutes until crackers are coated well.

Step 4. Spread crackers out on wax paper and let dry for an hour.

Store in an airtight container.

Allowing spicy ranch crackers to dry on counter.

Storage

Once these crackers have air-dried, it’s best to store these crackers in an airtight container for 4-5 days.

Spicy ranch crackers close-up.

Food Gift Wrapping Idea

Around the holidays, giving food gifts is such a great idea. These spicy crackers are the perfect food gift idea! Simply store them in an airtight container, or a little box, and tie a ribbon around it.

Spicy ranch crackers in box for gift.

More Snack Recipes You’ll Love

Whether you need snacks for a party or just for munching on during the holidays, you’ll love these other snack recipes:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Spicy ranch crackers in white bowl.
Print Pin
4.17 from 53 votes

Spicy Crackers Recipe

Spicy Crackers Recipe: Seasoned crackers that are the perfect party snack. Sometimes called "firecrackers" or ranch crackers, this no bake recipe has tons of flavor.
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Resting Time 1 hour
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 29 servings
Calories 70kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 16 ounces saltine crackers
  • 1 ½ cup canola oil
  • 1 ounce package ranch dressing seasoning
  • 3 Tablespoons garlic pepper
  • 1 Tablespoons red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Place crackers in a large bowl or container.
  • In a separate bowl, mix oil, ranch seasoning, garlic pepper & red pepper.
  • Pour mixture over crackers and toss every 15 minutes until crackers are coated well.
  • Spread crackers out on wax paper and let dry for an hour.
  • Store in an air tight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 5crackers | Calories: 70kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Fat: 4g | Sodium: 778mg | Potassium: 13mg | Vitamin A: 80IU | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 0.3mg

20 Favorite Hamburger Recipes

With so many tasty ways to make hamburgers, you are sure to agree they are one of the most versatile dinner options for families.

Hamburgers can be served with a variety of toppings, so you can customize them to your liking, (like we did with our burger bar) so they are always a great option for picky eaters! I have made them in so many ways over the years. You can find my favorites recipes below!

A collage of pictures of hamburgers with a text overlay.

Don’t forget to save this collection to your easy dinner board.  Make a batch of this red-skin potato salad, or these sweet potato fries for a great side to go with your burgers.

Donut Burgers

This idea brings dessert to the dinner table in a big, bold way! Tuck a juicy cheeseburger in between glazed donuts for a deliciously different way to have dinner at home.

A pastry brush brushing melted butter on top of the biscuits after the cheeseburger casserole has been cooked.

Cheeseburger Casserole

Skip the buns but deliver cheeseburger flavor with this easy casserole that can feed a hungry crowd. The biscuit topping offers a delicious twist on a classic.

Electric Skillet Burgers

Pull out the electric skillet and avoid that pesky stove top splatter. This recipe turns out to be a really good cheeseburger that is juicy and flavorful.

Venison burger on white plate, sitting next to french fries.

Venison Burgers

Combine deer with sausage and what you get is one amazing burger. Fry them, grill them or even bake them for a really great take on an all-American burger!

blue cheese burgers on pretzel bun

Blue Cheese Burgers

The easy addition of blue cheese elevates this recipe immediately. You are going to love the way this flavor pops with every bite.

burger sliders

Easy Cheeseburger Sliders

While these sliders might be smaller in size, they absolutely have a whole lot of big flavors tucked into each bite. Your family will love this recipe paired with eggplant fries.

Air Fryer Turkey Burgers with crispy jalapenos

Baked Turkey Burgers

Make burger night super juicy and healthy by using your air fryer and ground turkey. This easy weeknight recipe will be a hit with the whole family.

A Juicy Lucy burger on a plate cut in half to reveal the cheese inside.

Juicy Lucy Burgers

These burgers are the best! Skip the cheese topping and opt for a cheese stuffing to make these juicy burgers with beef, chicken or even turkey.

cooked burger patties on the grill

Grilled Frozen Burgers

No need to thaw your meat ahead of time. Master the art of grilling perfect burgers straight from the freezer every time, just in time for the summer bbq season.

Crispy Chicken Zinger Burgers

These chicken burgers taste even better than what you can get at KFC because they are homemade. It is spicy, crispy and so satisfying! Skip the drive thru and make these anytime you like!

cowboy burger on bun

Cowboy Burgers

Pile this burger high with bbq sauce and onion rings and take a big bite for a beefy burger that is so delicious! This recipe is better than any drive-thru offering.

Oven Baked Cheeseburgers

This recipe has gone viral for a good reason; it makes the best burgers! Click over to find out the trick that makes these burgers melt in your mouth.

Smoked Burgers

Give these easy burgers the best flavor by smoking them! These are great for a weeknight dinner, or as the star of any backyard bbq!

Cheeseburgers in the air fryer

Air Fryer Burgers

Make your burgers in the air fryer for a fuss-free way to get the best flavor! You will love that you can skip the grill and still get great taste.

Cheeseburger on bun with red onions, pickle

Stove Top Burgers

Grab some salt and pepper, ground beef patties and your favorite skillet to make these really good burgers! Use your favorite toppings to make each burger as unique as the person eating it.

Close up of cheeseburger sub, sitting on white plate.

Cheeseburger Subs

Why not have your favorite burgers in sub form? This idea is so fun and mixes things up from your typical hamburger recipe.

Spicy Mala Chicken Burgers by Sift and Simmer

Who says burgers have to be made of beef? This recipe makes for spicy chicken burgers that are simply irresistible with a delectable crunchy exterior!

Guber Burger by Food Meanderings

This sounds like a wacky burger; it has peanut butter in it! But, this protein packed meal tastes amazing. I know you will enjoy the creamy texture peanut butter adds.

duck burgers with cherry ketchup

Duck Burgers with Cherry Ketchup by Ugly Duckling Bakery

Make burger night delightfully different by making duck burgers! This recipe also has a really wonderful cherry ketchup recipe included so you can go all the way for the best flavor.

chicken Parmesan burgers

Chicken Parm Burgers by Spend With Pennies

This recipe is as delicious as it is unique. It brings chicken parm flavor to a juicy burger form. Your family will love this take on two classics, mashed up into one.

Which of these burger recipes would your family like the most? I hope you will leave a comment and let me know if you try any of the recipes in this collection.

Common Questions:

How can I jazz up a hamburger?

Adding different toppings, uncommon seasonings, and thinking outside of the box for a bun, are great ways to jazz up hamburgers!

What can you add to hamburger meat to make it taste better?

Mixing in seasonings and fat content can make hamburger meat taste even better. Seasonings such as spices, condiments and even items such as butter or cooking oils.

What keeps burgers juicy?

The fat content can help burgers stay juicy. Whether or not you buy the ground beef with natural fat content or you add it. You can add fat content by adding items such as butter but you can also add different types of fatty meat, such as pork to help make the burger juicier.

Topping Ideas for Burgers

Options are endless for topping your burgers. Here are some of our favorite hamburger toppings:

  • ketchup
  • mustard
  • mayo
  • ranch dressing
  • bbq sauce
  • guacamole
  • lettuce
  • onions
  • tomatoes
  • pickles
  • bacon
  • cheeses
  • pineapple
  • fried onions
  • hot sauce
  • spice blends
  • fried egg
  • potato chips
  • jalapenos
  • mushrooms
  • taco sauce
  • pizza sauce

Types of Cheese for Burgers

Cheese on a burger can be as simple as using American cheese, or as fun as using something wild like, goat cheese! Here are types of cheese to consider for your next burger:

  • American
  • Swiss
  • pepper jack
  • Colby-jack
  • cheddar
  • Havarti
  • queso
  • gouda
  • goat
  • blue cheese

Buns for Burgers

Although using a bun for burgers is common, there are different types of buns that can be fun to use. Here are some common types, to some fun, experimental types:

  • hamburger bun
  • brioche
  • Hawaiian buns
  • sandwich thins
  • lettuce leaves
  • donuts
  • waffles
  • biscuit
  • pancakes

How to Store Leftover Burgers

If you have leftover hamburger patties, and are looking for ways to reheat them, here are different ways you can warm them up to enjoy again:

  • air fryer
  • oven
  • stove-top
  • grill
  • hibachi, flat-top grill
  • microwave

Tips for the Best Burgers

  • Use high-quality ground beef. The quality of the ground beef will make a big difference in the taste of your burgers. Look for ground beef that is 80% lean or leaner. You’ll find more ground beef recipes for dinner if you have more on hand!
  • Don’t overwork the meat. When you are forming the patties, be gentle. Overworking the meat will make the burgers tough.
  • Season the meat well. Season the meat with salt, pepper, and your favorite seasonings.

Side Dishes for Hamburgers

There are so many side dish ideas to serve with your favorite cheeseburger. Some of our favorites are french fries, pasta salads, and even a green salad recipe.

Love these Recipe Collections?

If you love being able to find some of the best recipes that we’ve collected for you, then you’ll love these others:

Butter Chicken Recipe

This Butter Chicken Recipe has so much flavor, and Indian recipes like this are meant to be shared. You’ll love this easy recipe because it’s one of the best weeknight dinners that still tastes delicious the next day. Plus, you can add some Side Dishes, and you’re set.

Cooked butter chicken, next to white rice, in large serving bowl.

Tender chicken recipes are always popular! Be sure to check out another Indian recipe, this Chilli Chicken.

This Bacon Wrapped Chicken Thighs as well as my Chicken Street Tacos for more fun and simple chicken dinner recipes.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It tastes like authentic Indian cuisine: It’s so good you’ll be ready to make it a second time. 
  • Simple to make: You’ll love that you can whip this up your first time and have it taste perfect. 
  • It’s versatile: This is a simple recipe that can easily be turned into a vegetarian option by cutting out the protein and adding in vegetables instead. 

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

  • Butter – We use unsalted for this recipe, but you can use salted if you prefer. Just remember that you may want to reduce the amount of salt the recipe calls for if using salted butter.
  • Cream – Double (heavy) cream is best. Make sure it’s at room temperature. If added in when cold, it will cause the caramel to split.
  • Skinless Chicken Thighs – This type of chicken is needed to keep it tender and juicy, however, chicken breast could be used as well.
  • Tomato Sauce – This is used to help add acidity to the dish. If you don’t have tomato sauce, a tad bit of tomato paste could be an option.
  • Basmati Rice – The texture of the rice pairs so well with the curry texture. If you don’t have Basmati, white rice or brown rice can be a good pairing, too.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • White Onion – Sweet onions or scallions can be an option, too. Scallions would be a great topping for this simple dish.
  • Chicken Breasts – Any cut of chicken will work for this dish as long as there is no added skin or bones.
  • Naan Bread – While this is optional to add, it’s a fun dipper to this dish. If you don’t have Naan bread, any type of bread will work.

Variations

If you love recipes but like to change them up, this Creamy Butter Chicken Recipe is very forgiving.

  • Main Ingredient – Even though chicken is the star of the recipe, you can easily make it without the chicken added. Using vegetables like broccoli, zucchini, onions, and cauliflower are great options for making a simple and healthy dish with wonderful curry flavors.

Equipment

  • Large saucepan
  • Measuring tools
  • Mixing tools
  • Cutting board
  • Knife

How to Make Butter Chicken Recipe Without Garam Masala

This easy recipe has easy-to-follow steps. Just be sure to gather all the needed ingredients before starting.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

You’ll start the basis of the recipe by adding butter to a pan over medium heat on the stove.

Steps 1-4 for how to make butter chicken.

STEP 1. Cook the onion. Add the diced onion and garlic to the pot and saute for 3-5 minutes. (Image 1).

STEP 2. Add the spices. Add the cumin, ground coriander, ground ginger, allspice, turmeric, and sea salt and stir to combine.  (Image 2)

STEP 3: Add the chicken. Put the diced chicken into the pan and cook until the chicken is browned. (Image 3)

STEP 4: Stir. Make sure that the chicken is stirred in with the rest of the ingredients. (Image 4)

Steps 5-8 for how to make butter chicken recipe.

STEP 5: Add the tomato sauce. Pour in the tomato sauce with the cooked chicken and other ingredients. (Image 5)

STEP 6: Simmer. Reduce the cooking heat to low and cover. (Image 6)

STEP 7: Add the cream. Once the simmering time has passed, pour in the cream. (Image 7)

STEP 8: Add butter. Add the rest of the butter and garnish. (Image 8)

Tip: Make sure that the chicken is cooked all the way. You can use a meat thermometer to test some of the chicken pieces before stirring into the rest of the ingredients. Fully cooked chicken should have an internal temperature of at least 165 degrees.

Cooked butter chicken in skillet.

Once you serve this in a bowl, add some homemade naan bread as the perfect pairing. You can also pair it with cauliflower rice as well. This is a great way to add more veggies to the dish.

Close up of butter chicken in skillet, with serving spoon dipped in.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Allow to fully cool. The flavor of this dish does intensify as it cools. If you can let it cool down slightly, the outcome is incredible.
  • Add some spice. You can take this best butter chicken recipe and crank up the heat. Add some red chili powder, and enjoy.
Hand dipping naan bread in to butter chicken.

Recipe FAQs

What is the difference between chicken makhani and butter chicken?

While both are popular Indian food items at Indian restaurants, there is no difference between the two. Butter chicken is made with a makhani sauce and may be called by either name. Both are considered authentic Indian butter chicken recipes and can be called by either name. 

How is butter chicken traditionally eaten?

This is one of the most popular curries to be eaten with Naan bread or rice. People will also add extra sauce and top with fresh cilantro for a truly delicious flavor. A lot of butter chicken recipes are served with bite-sized pieces of Naan bread for dipping. 

Why is my butter chicken bland?

You just need to add a teaspoon of salt or other species if you feel like this recipe is bland. You’ll find that a lot of butter chicken recipes need to be altered a bit to find the perfect flavor. This is why recipe testing of the sauce recipe is so important to do! You want to end up with a 5 star rating flavor once you make it. 

What is butter chicken sauce made of?

The great thing about making this simple chicken recipe is that the ingredients aren’t hard to find at all. You more than likely have most of them already in your fridge and pantry. See the recipe card below for the full list of needed ingredients.

What’s the difference between tikka masala and butter chicken?

The biggest difference between the two is the flavor. Butter chicken has a creamier taste and texture while Tikka Masala has a bit of spice to it.

What gives butter chicken its color?

The added spices like turmeric are what help to give this delicious dish its golden coloring.

Why is it called butter chicken?

When made, there is not only butter added as an ingredient but butter is also added as another garnish, too. More butter, please!

What to Serve with Creamy Butter Chicken

This butter chicken recipe ingredients go well with Easy Italian White Bread as well as Naan bread. You can also serve this simple dish with The BEST Side Salad Recipe as well.

Storage

You can store any leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge.

If you decide that you need to store it longer than that, simply freeze it for up to 2 months.

When you’re ready to reheat and eat, thaw it overnight in the fridge and reheat in a saucepan over low heat. Stirring occasionally until it’s heated all the way.

More Simple Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Butter Chicken next to white rice in large serving bowl.
Print Pin
5 from 2 votes

Butter Chicken Recipe

This Butter Chicken Recipe is a fast and simple dish. Perfect for a quick weeknight dinner, loaded with authentic Indian flavor.
Course Main Course
Cuisine Indian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 29 minutes
Total Time 34 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 428kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons butter salted
  • 1 white onion medium and chopped
  • 1½ tablespoons minced garlic
  • 2 tablespoons cumin
  • 1 tablespoon ground coriander
  • 2 teaspoons ground ginger
  • 2 teaspoons allspice
  • 1½ teaspoons turmeric
  • 1 teaspoon sea salt
  • 1 package chicken thighs boneless and skinless, about 2 pounds, cut into 1-inch pieces
  • 1 can tomato sauce 15 ounces
  • ¾ cup heavy cream
  • fresh cilantro chopped, optional
  • basmati rice steamed, optional
  • naan bread optional

Instructions

  • Melt 3 tablespoons butter in a saucepan over medium heat.
  • Add the chopped onion into the pan and saute for 3-5 minutes. The onion should be transulcent.
  • Add the minced garlic and stir. Cook for 1 minute.
  • Add the the cumin, ground coriander, ground ginger, allspice, turmeric and sea salt and stir to combine. 
  • Cook everything for about 30 seconds.
  • Add in the diced chicken and stir. Cook for 2-4 minutes and make sure that it's fully coated with the spices. The chicken should be browned on all four sides from the heat and cooking.
  • Add the tomato sauce. Stir, and then simmer.
  • Put the heat on low, add a lid and simmer for about 12 minutes., or until the chicken reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees.
  • Stir in the heavy cream and let simmer for 5-7 minutes.
  • Stir in 1 tablespoon of butter.
  • Garnish with the optional items. Serve and enjoy.

Notes

NOTE: Make sure that the chicken is cooked all the way. You can use a meat thermometer to test some of the chicken pieces before stirring into the rest of the ingredients. Fully cooked chicken should have an internal temperature of at least 165 degrees.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 428kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 146mg | Sodium: 1071mg | Potassium: 670mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1265IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 4mg

Fish Sliders

Get ready to dive into the fantastic world of flavors with our delightful Filet-o-Fish Sliders. These simple sandwiches pack a punch of taste, combining tender, flaky fish with a tangy, homemade sauce and Hawaiian buns.

Fish sliders on cookie sheet, ready to eat.

Perfect for a family gathering or as a quick weeknight dinner, these sliders will be an instant hit with both kids and adults alike for a lunch idea or even an easy dinner idea. So, let’s get started and whip up these flavor-packed bites that will leave your taste buds asking for more.

Love the idea of a seafood slider but not looking for a “fried fish” recipe? These salmon sliders give you the seafood vibe but may be a healthier option.

If you want to go for more recipes using those tasty Hawaiian sliders, you’ll love our most popular slider recipe, these cheeseburger sliders, or even these delicious roast beef sliders!

Or, why not try Hawaiian Roll Breakfast Sliders for breakfast? They are a great recipe for a boost to your breakfast menu. Or for a lunch option, try Italian Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls to fill everyone up.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Easy to customize: You can swap out the ingredients easily to use what you have or what you prefer
  • Quick and simple: These sliders don’t take long to make so are ideal for evenings when time is short.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for fish sliders.
  • Buns – We used Hawaiian slider buns as there are 9 in the pack.
  • Fish fillets – I bought 8 fish fillets for the recipe but only ended up using 7 to fill the sandwiches.
  • Cheese – Any good American cheese will work nicely for this recipe.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Hawaiian slider buns: If you can’t find Hawaiian slider buns or prefer a different type, you can easily substitute them with any small-sized buns. If you’re watching your carbs, consider using whole wheat or multigrain slider buns. For an extra zing, pretzel buns can be an interesting choice.
  • American cheese: If American cheese isn’t your favorite or if you’re looking for a healthier option, try using a slice of sharp cheddar for a more robust flavor or a slice of provolone for a milder taste. For those who are lactose intolerant or vegan, there are many non-dairy cheeses available in the market that melt well and taste great.

Variations

If you want to add a unique twist to these Fish Sliders, here are a few suggestions that you might want to consider:

  • Go spicy: If you’re a fan of heat, consider adding a layer of spicy mayo or your favorite hot sauce to your sliders, like we use in our buffalo chicken sliders. You could also sprinkle some crushed red pepper flakes or cayenne pepper on the fish fillets before baking them.
  • Add some greens: For an added health kick, you can add a layer of fresh spinach, arugula, this KFC coleslaw recipe, or fresh lettuce to your sliders. This will not only add nutrition but also a nice crunch.
  • Try a different protein: If fish isn’t your favorite protein, you can easily substitute it with grilled chicken, turkey, or even a veggie patty for a vegetarian alternative.
  • Cheese variety: Experiment with different types of cheese. A smoked gouda or creamy brie can take your sliders to a whole new level of deliciousness.
  • Add pickles: For a tangy crunch, consider adding sliced pickles to your sliders. Dill or bread and butter pickles both work great.

How to Make Fish Sliders

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Cook the fish fillets. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees Fahrenheit, or as directed on the packaging of your frozen fish filets. Proceed to cook them according to the package instructions. (Image 1 and 2)

Steps 1-2 baked fried fish on cookie sheet.

STEP 2: Mix the butter. In the meantime, combine butter and ½ teaspoon of Old Bay seasoning in a separate bowl, then heat them together in the microwave for approximately 30 seconds until melted. (Image 4)

Steps 3-6 for making sauce and bun glaze for fish sliders.

STEP 3: Make the sauce (optional). Prepare the optional sauce by combining the ingredients together. (Image 5-6)

STEP 4: Layer the cheese and butter. Begin by slicing the buns in half. Place a layer of cheese on the bottom buns and generously spread melted butter and seasonings on the top bun. (Image 7-9)

Steps 7-10 of how to make fish sliders.

STEP 5: Add extra butter (optional). If desired, you can utilize any remaining melted butter to brush the buns once they are out of the oven. (Image 8)

STEP 6: Heat the sliders. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees and bake for 2-3 minutes, or until the cheese has melted to perfection (Image 10)

STEP 7: Add a piece of fish and sauce then serve. Take out from the oven and place a portion of fried fish on each bun (you may need to cut some pieces in half to fit better). Drizzle with sauce, slice the buns into individual sliders, and savor the deliciousness. (Images 11-14)

Steps 11-14 for making fish sliders.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Choosing the fish: Opt for a mild white fish like cod, haddock, or tilapia. These types are less “fishy” and work great for sliders.
  • Cooking the fish: Make sure not to overcook the fish. It should be flaky and moist, not dry.
  • Melting the cheese: Be watchful while melting the cheese in the oven. It should melt evenly and not burn.
  • Serving hot: Serve the Fish Sliders hot for the best taste. If you’re preparing them in advance, you can reheat them in the oven before serving.
  • Experiment with sauce: Don’t be afraid to play around with the sauce. You can add more or less of the ingredients to suit your personal preference.
  • Slider size: Ensure the fish fillets are the correct size for your slider buns, so they don’t overhang. If necessary, cut into smaller fish pieces or use larger buns.

Recipe FAQs

Can I use fresh fish instead of frozen?

Absolutely! If you have access to fresh fish, feel free to use it in place of frozen. You’ll need to adjust the cooking times appropriately as fresh fish will typically cook faster than frozen.

Can I use a different type of bread for the fish sliders? 

Yes, you can. While brioche buns are a popular choice for sliders because of their sweetness and soft texture, you can use any type of small bun or roll. Whole wheat or gluten-free buns can be a healthier alternative.

I don’t have Old Bay seasoning. What can I use instead?

Old Bay is a blend of spices typically used in seafood dishes. If you don’t have it, you can make a similar blend with equal parts of paprika, dry mustard, and celery salt, with a pinch each of black pepper, red pepper flakes, ground nutmeg, and ground cloves.

Can I make these sliders ahead of time?

You can prepare individual items ahead of time, but they’re best assembled and served immediately to maintain the freshness of the fish and the crispness of the buns.

What cheese is best for fish sliders?

While American cheese is suggested in the recipe, feel free to experiment with your favorite kinds of cheese. Gouda, mozzarella, and Swiss are all delicious options.

What to Serve with Fish Sliders

Fish Sliders are a versatile dish that pairs well with a variety of sides. Here are some suggestions:

  • Crispy Sweet Potato Fries: A healthier alternative to traditional french fries, air fryer sweet potato fries are a delicious companion to fish sliders. Their sweet, earthy taste complements the savory flavors of the sliders perfectly.
  • Coleslaw: This classic side dish adds a refreshing crunch to your meal. You can stick with traditional coleslaw or experiment with variations like apple slaw, tangy red cabbage slaw, or a coleslaw mix.
  • Green Salad: A simple green salad with a light vinaigrette dressing can be a nice, light accompaniment to balance out the heartiness of the sliders.
  • Pickle Spears: The tangy flavor of pickles pairs well with the rich flavors of the fish and cheese. Plus, they add a nice crunch to your meal.
  • Pasta Salad: A chilled pasta salad, especially one with a tangy vinaigrette, can make a wonderful side for these hearty sliders.
Hand holding fish slider with Old Bay sauce drizzled on top.

Storage

Storing leftover Fish Sliders is a breeze and can come in handy for quick meals throughout the week. Firstly, let the sliders cool down completely. Transfer them to an airtight container or wrap them individually in cling wrap or aluminum foil. Leftover Fish Sliders can be stored in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 

To reheat, preheat the oven to 350 degrees and bake for approximately 10 minutes, or until the sliders are warmed through and the cheese is melty. 

It is not recommended to freeze them as the texture of the fish and buns can become soggy upon thawing.

Fish sliders stacked on top of one another, sitting on white plate.

More Fish Recipes You’ll Love

Got a taste for fish and want to try more fish recipes for the whole family? You could start with another really simple one: Fish Finger Tacos, perfect for an evening meal. Or if you have an air fryer, try this simple Easy Air Fryer Tilapia Recipe for something a little different.

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Fish sliders on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 6 votes

Fish Sliders

These fish sliders are a party-food favorite or easy dinner recipe that the family will love. Use this homemade sauce and Hawaiian buns to pair with the fish for delicious flavor.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 158kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 8 Hawaiian slider buns not the slider rolls
  • 8 frozen fish sandwich fillets
  • 9 slices Cheese – American
  • 2 tablespoons butter
  • ½ teaspoon Old Bay seasoning

Optional Ingredients

  • 8 dabs hot sauce
  • 1 teaspoon Old Bay
  • 1 lemon juice
  • ¾ cup mayo

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 425 – or the directions on your frozen fish filets. Cook them accordingly.
  • Meanwhile, mix butter and ½ teaspoon Old Bay and melt together for about 30 seconds in microwave.
  • Slice buns in half, put cheese on bottom buns, and top the other with melted butter and seasonings.
  • Put in oven at 425°F for 2-3 minutes or until cheese is melted.

Optional Sauce

  • Mix together hot sauce, Old Bay, lemon juice and mayo.
  • Optional, use any leftover melted butter to brush buns again after coming out of oven.
  • Remove from oven and top with fried fish (may have to cut some pieces of fish in half to fit the buns better), top with sauce, slice buns in to individual sliders, and enjoy.

Video

Notes

Old Bay sauce – It can also be served on the side, or spread on half of the sliders if the sauce isn’t desired by everyone. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1slider | Calories: 158kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 703mg | Potassium: 61mg | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 397IU | Calcium: 439mg | Iron: 0.3mg

Instant Pot Pork Butt

Tender, shredded Instant Pot Pork Butt is the perfect meal for a party or for an easy dinner idea! Delicious eaten as is, or served on a bun for a pulled pork sandwich with a drizzle of bbq sauce and even topped with cole slaw if desired.

Instant Pot recipes are one of our favorites here because of the ease and how tender meats turn out in this pressure cooker. Our Instant Pot roast is another recipe that you’ll want to keep on hand for go-to dinner, and then these Instant Pot brownies are something to try to conquer that sweet tooth.

Cooked Instant Pot pork butt in white bowl.

I love a good sandwich! Barbecue pork feels like you were cooking all day and is a lovely meal to share with friends. Sometimes you want a hot meal such as Hot Ham and Cheese Sandwiches but there’s also something truly refreshing about a cool Egg Salad Sandwich.

Make this pulled pork for a fun summer gathering or even as a delicious meal in the wintertime. You can set the Instant Pot to cook while everyone enjoys company or takes a dip in the pool. Then simply shred and let everyone make their own custom sandwich, making BBQ pork sliders, or enjoy alone, or even topped on a baked potato!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Super tender meat: Combining this specific cut and cooking method will yield a tender meat that shreds easily and makes a delicious sandwich.
  • Make-ahead recipe: You can cook this up whenever you have time and freeze the meat ready to go! This makes for a quick and easy dinner.
  • Don’t heat up the house: The Instant Pot is perfect for making meals in summer so you don’t heat up the house with the oven.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for Instant Pot pulled pork.
  • Pork – Select a pork butt or shoulder for the best result. We’ll go into the differences in the FAQs below!
  • Seasonings – We are mixing up our own barbecue dry rub to layer on the flavor to our pork.
  • Apple Cider Vinegar – Adding an acid helps to break down the connective tissue in the meat as it cooks.
  • Liquid Smoke – If you haven’t used this, it’s the perfect secret ingredient to have in your kitchen. It adds a touch of color and a smokey flavor.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • ACV – white vinegar doesn’t have the same tang, but it can be used in a pinch. You definitely don’t want to leave out the vinegar entirely as it helps break down the meat.
  • Sauce – while this is typically served with barbecue sauce, you can always skip it and let the pork shine by itself.

Equipment

A 6-quart Instant Pot or other electric pressure cooker is required to cook this tender pulled pork.

How to Make Instant Pot Pulled Pork Butt

The pork is easily prepared:

  • trim fat and bone and portion into chunks
  • rub on seasoning and sear
  • pressure cook in liquid

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Prepare the roast to be ready to cook, then let the Instant Pot heat up while you mix the rub.

Steps 1-4 of how to make Instant Pot pork butt.

STEP 1. Prepare the pork. Remove any bone that is present, and trim up excess fat around the edges. Some cuts may have skin still which should also be removed (Image 1). Cut the roast into several large chunks (Image 2).

STEP 2. Make the rub. Combine the seasonings and brown sugar into a rub, then rub it into all sides of the cut pork.

Steps 3-6 to make pork butt in the Instant Pot.

STEP 3. Heat the pot. Let the Instant Pot heat on sauté mode, then add the oil (Image 3). Brown the chunks of pork on all sides, working in batches (Image 4).

STEP 4. Deglaze the pot. Remove the browned pork and add water. Be sure to carefully scrape up all of the browned bits on the bottom with a wooden spoon!

Steps 7-10 on how to make pork butt in the Instant Pot.

STEP 5. Whisk. Add the remaining ingredients to the Instant Pot and whisk to combine.

STEP 6. Cook pork. Add the browned pork to the liquid and pressure cook.

Tip: Ensure the pork is all in a single layer in the liquid. This will allow it to all cook evenly. It’s ok to squish it in!

STEP 7. Shred the pork. Remove the cooked pork to a plate and shred with two forks to serve.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Deglaze the pot. Don’t miss this step! If you leave any browned bits on the bottom of the pot, you risk them burning. This causes an error and the pot won’t come to pressure and cook the pork.
  • Allow a natural pressure release. One of the most important steps with the Instant Pot is to let meat have a natural release. This allows the juices to settle instead of pulling them all out by performing a quick release immediately when cooking is complete.
Shredded pork butt that was cooked in the Instant Pot, sitting on white platter.

Recipe FAQs

What cut of pork should I use?

Stick with pork shoulder or pork butt. Contrary to the name, the pork “butt” comes from the same area of the animal as the shoulder! The butt is often fattier and sometimes comes with the skin attached. The shoulder will generally have a bone left in and is a leaner cut. Both work well here and both will need to be trimmed of excess fat before cooking. Remove any bone and skin as well.

Is it necessary to sear pork before cooking?

The answers are often mixed on this. Searing locks in the juices – but because we are using the Instant Pot, this also locks in juice compared to roasting in the oven. However, it does add a lot of flavor to the pork and the cooking liquid, so it is a must in my book.

How long does it take to cook pork in the Instant Pot?

You read the recipe right – we did 80 minutes! While certainly not “instant” it a hands-off way to create tender pork for sandwiches. This is also why we cut the pork into chunks. While more surface area seared equals more flavor, it also helps the meat to cook evenly and perfectly. It would take even longer if left whole!

Why isn’t my Instant Pot pork tender?

Usually the culprit is releasing the pressure too quickly! The pressure is all nicely contained from cooking the meat, and if we release it as soon as the cooking time is up, it can pull the juices from the meat. By allowing 20 minutes or so for the pressure to come down on its own, we are ensuring the juices have settled and will remain in the meat.

What to Serve with Instant Pot Pulled Pork

I love to serve this on a bun (on large buns or sliders) but it is also great just piled on a plate.

You can also serve your favorite coleslaw right on top or on the side, and pickles are the perfect companion! Love a gravy on your shredded pork? This pork gravy recipe is a hit on a lot of pork recipes!

I also love this honey lime fruit salad as a refreshing palate cleanser or a red potato salad for the perfect pairing.

Instant Pot pork butt, shredded, on white plate.

Storage

Allow any leftover pork to come to room temperature, then store in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 4 days. You can also freeze in a container or bag for up to 6 months. I recommend storing the meat as-is and adding sauce once reheated.

Reheat in a slow cooker with some broth or water, or you can easily reheat on the stovetop.

Shredded pork butt on bun, with coleslaw on top, and sitting on a white plate.

More BBQ Pork Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Cooked Instant Pot pork butt in white bowl, sitting next to barbecue sauce.
Print Pin
5 from 6 votes

Instant Pot Pork Butt

This Instant Pot Pork Butt (or pork shoulder) is so easy to make, that's great alone or served on a bun as a bbq pork sandwich.
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Prep Time 35 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 55 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 284kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 3-4 pounds pork butt or pork shoulder
  • 3 tablespoons brown sugar Divided
  • 2 teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon mustard powder
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoon cooking oil
  • ¾ cup water
  • ½ cup apple cider vinegar
  • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ¼ teaspoon liquid smoke

Optional Serving Ideas

  • Barbecue sauce
  • Hamburger buns or slider buns
  • Coleslaw
  • Pickles

Instructions

  • Cut pork into 3-4 chunks, removing bone and excess fat.
  • Set the Instant Pot to sauté mode. While warming up, mix all of the dry spices with 1 tablespoon of the brown sugar.
  • Rub the sugar and spice mixture onto the chunks of pork.
  • When the Instant Pot reads HOT add the oil. Tilt the pot back and forth to evenly coat the bottom. Then place the seasoned meat chunks into the instant pot. Be sure to get an even layer of meat; you may need to work in batches.
  • Brown the meat on each side for 3-4 minutes. When all sides are brown remove the meat from the pot.
  • Add the water to the pot to deglaze. Use a flat spoon to scrape the bits off of the bottom.
  • Once the pot is deglazed, whisk in the vinegar, tomato paste, liquid smoke, and the rest of the brown sugar.
  • Place all of the browned meat back into the pot in an even layer. You may need to wiggle and squish them a bit to do this.
  • Pressure cook on high for 60 minutes and allow a natural release for 20 minutes.
  • At the end of 20 minutes release any remaining pressure. Remove the pork from the pot. Place onto a plate and shred with two forks.
  • Optional: you can use the juices left in the pot as a sauce, but depending on the cut of meat it may be very greasy.
  • Serve the shredded pork with your favorite sides and barbecue sauce, or with all of your favorites on a bun.

Notes

  • For a nice kick you can add ¼ teaspoon of cayenne pepper to the seasoning rub.
  • This reheats great and can be made the day before.
  • Reheating in a slow cooker is best (so that it doesn’t dry out as easily) but it can also be reheated in the microwave or in a skillet. Be sure to save any juices from cooking to reheat the meat with if they aren’t too greasy.
  • Refrigerate in an airtight container for up to 4 days or freeze for up to 6 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 102mg | Sodium: 309mg | Potassium: 673mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 377IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 3mg

Slow Cooker Shredded Beef Tacos

These Slow Cooker Shredded Beef Tacos will be a big hit for your family or the next friendly gathering. With the perfect amount of seasoning and all your favorite toppings, tacos on your Tuesday will be next level, especially since it’s one of our easy slow cooker recipes!

Shredded beef tacos folded up in line with toppings.

Beef is the essential taco filling in my book. You can also serve up some quick Chicken Street Tacos to cover all the bases! Does your family get tired of the “same old” week after week? I also love to mix things up and turn tacos into a fun pasta dish, making this Dorito Taco Salad, or switching to a warming Taco Soup when the weather turns chilly.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • Custom spice level: Grab a packet of seasoning at the store, or mix up your own and vary the spiciness.
  • Hands off: The perfect pulled beef tacos need to cook all day to achieve the tenderness we are looking for, meaning it’s only about 15 minutes to assemble and later shred!
  • The perfect leftovers: Especially for a smaller family, this recipe makes enough for leftovers. Cook once, eat twice! We love making slow cooker pulled beef too for tacos!

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for shredded beef tacos.
  • Chuck roast – I think this is the best cut of meat for pulled beef tacos because it is affordable, and it has just the right amount of marbling that lends itself well to slow cooking.
  • Flour tortillas – I used soft taco shells but you can always add crunch by picking up hard taco shells instead.
  • Taco seasoning – make it easy and use a packet, or stir up your own special seasoning.
  • Beef broth – We are using just enough, combined with tomato sauce, to make a taco that won’t be sad and dry.
  • Toppings – Go wild here! I suggest tomato, avocado, and sour cream. Add cheese if you like!

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Taco seasoning – see the notes in the recipe card to whip up your own “packet.” I’ve also easily used Chicken Taco Seasoning on beef.
  • Broth – you can use homemade or store-bought. I even like to keep a jar of “broth base” in the fridge as it keeps longer than broth. Just dissolve into water per the directions before using. Beef stock and broth are also interchangeable.

Equipment

Get out your slow cooker! Just about every kitchen has one (or more!) and it’s the perfect way to achieve tender taco meat. A 6-8 quart size is best here, and will accommodate double the meat if you want to go that route. If you’re using the slow cooker function on your Instant Pot, then you’ll also want to keep this pulled pork recipe in the Instant Pot in mind, for a future dinner idea.

How to Make Slow Cooker Beef Tacos

I love these for busy days, especially if everyone is outside the house with work or errands. Take just a few minutes to add everything to the crockpot in the morning, and another few minutes to shred just before serving!

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 of how to make shredded beef tacos.

STEP 1. Prepare the Sauce. Combine the broth, tomato sauce, and garlic in the slower cooker.

STEP 2. Add the roast. Settle the roast into the liquid. Cover and cook on low.

STEP 3. Shred the beef. Use two forks to pull the beef into shreds.

Tip: The cooking liquid should give your shredded beef just the right texture, but feel free to splash in more water or broth if desired.

STEP 4. Season and serve. Stir the taco seasoning into the shredded beef. Add to taco shells and top as you like.

Slow cooker beef taco on tortilla with toppings.
Cooked taco flavored beef lifting out of slow cooker with tongs.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Make your own taco seasoning. This way you know exactly what you are adding to your meal. You can also easily keep things gluten-free if needed, and then you can use it for other recipes like this walking taco casserole.
  • Double it up. Doubling this recipe means you can stash half of the meat away in the freezer for a busy night!
  • Toppings are key. Red onions are classic, but you can use any variety. Use avocado or swap to guacamole.
Pulled beef taco on tortilla with toppings.

Recipe FAQs

Why do I need to use a chuck roast?

I find this cut of beef to be the perfect marriage of affordability and shredability. It’s a lean enough cut so you won’t have floating fat on top of your dish, but there is just the right amount of marbling to tenderize the meat. This is cut that definitely benefits from slow cooking – it will shred incredibly easily after the low and slow cook time.

What type of broth is best?

Grabbing a carton of broth is fine here! But if you do make your own, that definitely adds a lot of flavor. Bouillon cubes or a paste/base also work. Just rehydrate per the instructions on the product before adding to the slow cooker.

Can I make pulled beef tacos ahead?

You can absolutely make this taco filling ahead of time! It’s perfect for parties. Double the recipe for a larger crowd. It’s key to cool the meat completely before packing up to freeze. You can freeze in bags or containers and then easily reheat before serving. Just save the topping prep until you are ready to serve!

What to Serve with Beef Tacos

Skip plain diced tomato and whip up some fresh homemade Pico de Gallo for topping! Add chips and some Smoked Queso for the ultimate side dish. And since you’ve already got the chips ready, you may as well add Elote Dip.

Storage

Double this shredded beef taco recipe if you’d like! It makes for great leftovers if stored properly. Allow the beef to cool completely before sealing it in an airtight container. You can keep it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Store any prepped toppings in separate airtight containers in the refrigerator. 

I like to freeze flat in a gallon Ziploc bag! This allows you to easily break it up from frozen to help in reheating.

To reheat, spread the shredded beef out over a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil. Pop it in the oven at 350 degrees F for about 10 minutes or until heated through. This will give you some great browned bits. Alternatively, transfer the beef to a microwave-safe bowl and microwave in 30-second intervals (stirring between each) until heated through.  

Once you have reheated your beef, assemble the tacos as you normally would. 

More Taco Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Shredded beef tacos that were cooked in slow cooker, sitting on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 5 votes

Shredded Beef Tacos

Nothing is easier than setting the crockpot out in the morning and coming back to dinner, done! Top these tacos with your favorite toppings, as that's KEY to making the best shredded beef tacos!
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mexican
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 680kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • 1 slow cooker 6-8 quart size

Ingredients

  • 4 pounds chuck roast
  • ½ cup beef broth
  • 1 tablespoon minced garlic
  • ¼ cup tomato sauce
  • 1 package taco seasoning see notes to make your own!
  • 8 soft tortilla shells

Toppings

  • 1 tablespoon lime juice
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped
  • ½ cup sour cream
  • 2 avocados sliced
  • 1 tomato diced
  • ½ red onion diced

Instructions

  • Add the beef broth, tomato sauce, and garlic to the base of a 6-8 quart slow cooker and stir to combine. Set the beef roast on top of the liquid.
  • Put the lid on the slow cooker and cook on low for 8-10 hours.
  • Use 2 forks to shred the beef in the slow cooker.
  • Mix together the taco seasoning and shredded beef. Stir well; the juices from slow cooking the beef will mix with the taco seasoning. You can add extra water if needed.
  • Divide the shredded beef evenly between 8 taco shells and top with sour cream, cilantro, lime juice, avocado, tomato, and onion.

Notes

Not a store-bought taco seasoning person? No problem! Making your own is quite simple. Just whisk together the following ingredients:
  • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 1 ½ teaspoons cumin
  • ½ teaspoon cayenne
  • 1 tablespoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon pepper
  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoons oregano
  • ½ teaspoons red pepper flakes
Use homemade taco seasoning in this recipe just as you would a store-bought version. If you are sensitive to spice, feel free to cut back a bit on the paprika and/or cayenne.

Nutrition

Serving: 1taco | Calories: 680kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 165mg | Sodium: 984mg | Potassium: 1160mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 799IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 7mg

Pretzel Dip with Cream Cheese

Ready to try making your own Pretzel Beer Dip with Cream Cheese, a concoction guaranteed to elevate your snack game to unprecedented heights?

Pretzel dip with cream cheese in gray bowl, next to prezels and crackers.

This creamy, tangy, and slightly boozy dip pairs perfectly with soft pretzels (or any snack of your choice) and is bound to be the star of your next get-together as an appetizer or even as a snack recipe! Its unique blend of flavors, combined with its easy preparation, make it a recipe you’ll come back to time and time again. Prepare to be amazed as we journey into the mouthwatering world of this wonderful pretzel dip.

Looking for more appetizers for your party? Why not try Chicken Bacon Ranch Crescent Bites for a simple savory option?

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few simple ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Easy to make more: If you are making this for a party or BBQ, it is easy to just make a bigger batch.
  • No bake recipe: This dip is ready in less than 15 minutes and there’s no need to heat up the oven for it as it is a no-bake pretzel cheese dip.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

  • Cream cheese – We used plain cream cheese for this recipe as any flavors would change how the dip tasted.
  • Beer – I opted for Heineken, but it tends to be on the lighter side. For a more robust beer flavor, I recommend substituting it with a highly hopped IPA beer.
  • Cheese – I used a sharp cheddar for the recipe as it has plenty of taste.
Labeled ingredients for beer ranch dip.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Cream Cheese: You can substitute plain cream cheese with a dairy-free cream cheese option or Greek yogurt if you’re looking for a healthier option.
  • Beer: Non-alcoholic beer can be used as a substitute for regular beer if you’re aiming for a non-alcoholic version of this dip. Alternatively, for a gluten-free option, a gluten-free beer could be used.
  • Cheese: If you want a different flavor profile, try substituting sharp cheddar with a smoky Gouda or spicy Pepper Jack. For a vegan option, there are numerous vegan cheeses available in the market that could work as a substitute.

Variations

  • Flavor Boost: For a tangier version of this easy dip, you can add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard. If you’re a fan of heat, consider adding some chopped jalapenos or a dash of hot sauce.
  • Beer Alternatives: Instead of traditional beer, consider using a dark stout for a deeper, richer flavor. A crisp cider could also be used for a sweet and refreshing twist.
  • Toppings: Sprinkle some chopped fresh herbs like chives or parsley on top for added color and freshness. For a crunch, top with crispy bacon bits or toasted breadcrumbs.

How to Make Pretzel Beer Cheese Dip

This dip is broken into two components:

  • ​Mix the ingredients
  • Add toppings and chill

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Mix the ingredients. Combine the softened cream cheese, beer, and ranch dressing mix in a large bowl. Use a hand mixer to thoroughly blend the ingredients together. (Image 1).

STEP 2: Add the cheese. Gently incorporate the cheese using a rubber spatula, ensuring thorough mixing. (Image 2).

Two image collage of how to make beer ranch cheese dip.

STEP 3: Add the topping. Transfer the dip into a bowl and garnish it with freshly chopped scallions.

Green onions on top of beer cheese ranch dip.

STEP 4: Chill then serve. Enjoy this delectable treat served with pretzels or robust crackers, served slightly chilled for the perfect pairing.

Scoop of beer ranch dip on white plate next to beer bottle and pretzels.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Cream Cheese: For a smoother dip, ensure your cold cream cheese is sat at room temperature before you begin. This will make it easier to blend with the other ingredients.
  • Beer: The choice of beer can greatly influence the taste of your dip. Feel free to play around with different types until you find your preference.
  • Cheese: Grating your own cheese instead of buying pre-grated will result in a smooth, creamy dip.
  • Mixing: Avoid over-mixing once you add the cheese. Over-mixing could result in a less creamy and more gritty texture to your dip.
  • Serving: This dip is best served at room temperature or slightly chilled. If refrigerated, take it out a few minutes before serving.

Recipe FAQs

Can I use non-alcoholic beer?

Yes, you can use non-alcoholic beer. It will give you the same bubbly texture and similar flavor, making it a great option for those who prefer to avoid alcohol.

What can I serve this dip with?

This delicious dip pairs wonderfully with pretzels, robust crackers, or any of your favorite sturdy chips. For a lighter option, try serving it with crisp, fresh veggies like bell pepper strips or carrot sticks.

Can this dip be made ahead of time?

Absolutely! This dip can be made a day or two before you plan to serve it. Just store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator. When you’re ready to serve, let it sit at room temperature for about 15 minutes to soften, then give it a good stir.

Can I use a different type of cheese?

Yes, feel free to experiment with different cheeses to find your preferred flavor profile. Just keep in mind that softer cheeses will melt better and result in a smoother dip.

Is this dip gluten-free?

As long as you use a gluten-free beer and ensure your other ingredients are gluten-free, this dip should be safe for most people with gluten intolerance. However, if you’re serving guests with severe allergies or celiac disease, always double check the labels of all your ingredients to ensure they haven’t been processed in a facility that also processes gluten-containing products.

What to Serve with Beer Cheese Dip

This Beer Cheese Dip is a versatile appetizer that goes well with a variety of items. The robust, cheesy flavor perfectly complements the saltiness of soft pretzels, soft pretzel bites, or hearty rye crackers. It’s also delightful with an array of fresh vegetables, like celery sticks, cherry tomatoes, or broccoli florets for a healthier option. 

For a satisfying savory twist, try it with smoked sausage slices or grilled chicken skewers. Alternatively, toasted artisanal bread slices or homemade pita chips deliver a delightful crunch. No matter your preference, this dip is sure to be the star of the show at any gathering.

Storage

You can make a large batch or Store leftover Pretzel Beer Dip with Cream Cheese easily. Just place it in an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator. The dip should stay fresh for up to 3-4 days. 

To serve the chilled dip, just allow it to sit at room temperature for about 15 minutes for the flavors to meld and the dip to soften a bit, stirring well before serving. Although this dip is best enjoyed fresh, it still retains much of its deliciousness even after being stored!

More Snack Recipes You’ll Love

Don’t just stick to the one dip – try these great recipes as well! You can make a Jalapeno Artichoke Dip for a spicy option. Or if you want a warm dip option, make this Hot Taco Dip and go as spicy as you like!  Both are great for dipping savory pretzels!

This Pretzel Beer Cream Cheese Dip is one of our favorite dips.  This perfect recipe is the perfect appetizer for movie nights, family reunions, and game day snacking.  You will be sure to get a five-star rating!

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Ranch beer dip in tan bowl, next to pretzels and crackers.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Pretzel Dip with Cream Cheese

This creamy, tangy, and slightly boozy dip pairs perfectly with soft pretzels (or any snack of your choice) and is bound to be the star of your next get-together.  
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 12
Calories 212kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 16 ounces cream cheese softened
  • ⅓ cup beer
  • 1 envelope ranch dressing mix
  • 2 cups shredded cheddar cheese
  • Fresh chopped scallions for topping

Instructions

  • In a large bowl, mix the softened cream cheese, beer, and ranch dressing mix together with a hand mixer.
  • Fold in the cheese with a rubber spatula. Mix well.
  • Pour the dip into a bowl and top with freshly chopped scallions.
  • Serve slightly chilled with pretzels or sturdy crackers.

Tips

  • I used Heineken, but it is very light. If you want a deeper beer flavor, use a very hoppy IPA beer instead.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 212kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 66mg | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 696IU | Calcium: 170mg | Iron: 0.1mg

Strawberry Crunch Cake

This Strawberry Crunch Cake is a semi-homemade delicious treat! Made with a boxed strawberry cake mix and topped with a buttercream frosting and a strawberry crunch top, similar to the topping on our strawberry crunch cheesecake!

Slice of strawberry crunch cake on white plate, with fresh strawberries on top.

This truly fun cake recipe adds cookies to the frosting! It may sound strange to have crumbs in your frosting (something you usually avoid!) but it gives this strawberry crunch cake recipe just the right sort of texture. In the past, we’ve combined cookies in other baked goods like these Circus Animal Cookie Donuts but when it comes to a cake recipe, it really makes it super fun.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: The bright color is perfect for parties.
  • Semi-homemade: What could be easier than combining various boxes and ingredients with homemade frosting? Talk about the icing on the cake!
  • Showstopper: Between the texture, flavor, and fun decoration, everyone will be oohing and aahing when you bring dessert out.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for strawberry crunch cake.
  • Cake mix – Strawberry is the star here. Prepare per the box instructions if the amounts of water, oil, and eggs are different than in this recipe card. I also use a strawberry cake mix in this strawberry cake mix cookies recipe!
  • Freeze-dried strawberries – This is the perfect secret ingredient. It adds flavor and color without excessive sugar. We are also using it for texture!
  • Butter – I use unsalted. If you only have salted, then don’t add extra salt to the frosting.
  • Powdered sugar – Makes the perfect fluffy buttercream.
  • Shortbread cookies – What? Cookies in our frosting? You bet! It wouldn’t be a “crunch cake” without them!

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Frosting – I strongly recommend making your own buttercream here. If you want to cheat though, you can usually whip canned frosting with some powdered sugar in your mixer to come close to the same texture.
  • Butter – as in most of my recipes, the choice to use salted vs. unsalted is up to you. I know sometimes stores only have one kind on sale! Just keep in mind that you won’t want to add extra salt if your butter already has it.
  • Cookies – think Lorna Doones or Chessmen here. If you can’t find those then graham crackers will also work well. I haven’t tried it, and it may add a bit more sweetness than other options, but even golden Oreo cookies would be tasty!

Variations

  • Fruity fun – freeze-dried apples are also a common item you can find in the store. I think it would be great to try a spice cake and apples as a new variation of crunch cake!

How to Make Strawberry Crunch Cake

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 of how to make strawberry crunch cake.

STEP 1. Pulse the strawberries. Give half the strawberries a pulse in the food processor. Don’t completely obliterate them!

STEP 2. Prepare the cake. Prepare the cake as directed on the box, then stir in the chopped strawberries.

Steps 5-8 of how to make strawberry crunch cake.

STEP 3. Bake the cake. Bake in a prepared pan as directed and let the cake cool completely.

STEP 4. Prepare to crunch. Process the cookies and remaining strawberries.

Tip: If you do not have a food processor to process the shortbread cookies and freeze-dried strawberries, adding them to a large zip bag (like a freezer ziplock bag) and using a rolling pin to process them into a textured crumb will also work. Either way, your strawberry crumble will be perfect.

Baked strawberry cake in white cake pan.
Steps 9-12 for how to make strawberry crunch cake.

STEP 5. Make frosting. Whip the butter then add vanilla. Slowly add powdered sugar and beat to desired texture.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Allow to fully cool. Making sure that you allow the cake to completely cool before frosting is key or the frosting won’t turn out the way that it should.
  • Use baking spray. Not familiar with baking spray? This special can combines the flour with oil instead of just oil. This helps the cake release cleanly from the pan. No spray? Line the bottom only of the pan with a piece of parchment paper.
Steps 13-15 for how to make strawberry crunch cake.

STEP 6. Frost cake. Ensure the cake is completely cool, then spread the frosting evenly over the top.

STEP 7. Add crunch. Sprinkle the prepared crunchy topping over the entire cake.

Slice of strawberry crunch cake on white plate.

Recipe FAQs

I don’t normally have avocado oil. What can I use?

Avocado is a great choice because it has a neutral flavor. Other great options are canola or vegetable oils. In comparison, stay away from olive oil, for example, which can add a strong flavor to the cake.

What is strawberry crunch cake?

Think of this cake as emulating the flavors of those yummy strawberry shortcake crunch ice cream bars, just with cake instead of ice cream! That’s why we’ve “coated” the top of the cake with crushed cookies and strawberries.

What’s the best way to top the cake with strawberries?

If you want to add fresh strawberries to the top of your cake, do that just before serving. It will add a bright pop of color and some different texture. However, they will let juice run into the cake which could potentially water down the frosting if you do them too early. So it’s best to slice the cake and add strawberries to each serving.

Slice of cake on white plate with bite taken out with fork.

Storage

Did you know that buttercream doesn’t have to be refrigerated? This cake will last outside the fridge for about 3 days, as long as your kitchen isn’t too hot. But you can always keep in the fridge to extend the cake as well as keep that cool and creamy frosting just right.

More Strawberry Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Slice of strawberry cake on white plate with fresh strawberries on top.
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Strawberry Crunch Cake

This strawberry crunch cake is a semi-homemade delicious treat! Made with a boxed strawberry cake mix and topped with a buttercream frosting and a strawberry crunch top!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 13 minutes
Cook Time 34 minutes
Chill Time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 47 minutes
Servings 12 servings
Calories 459kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 box strawberry cake mix 15.25 ounces
  • 3 large eggs*
  • ½ cup avocado oil* or any neutral oil
  • 1 cup water*
  • ½ cup unsalted butter
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
  • 1 bag freeze-dried strawberries; divided 1 ounce
  • 3 cups powdered sugar
  • 5 shortbread cookies about 5 ounces total
  • 1-2 tablespoons milk

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350.
  • Add half of the bag of freeze-dried strawberries to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse 10 times to break up the strawberries. **If you do not have a food processor, you can add the strawberries to a zip bag and crush them using a rolling pin or a glass by rolling over the strawberries with gentle pressure. Set aside.
  • Grease a 13×9 baking pan using baking spray or butter and flour for dusting. You can also line the bottom of your 13×9 pan with a piece of parchment paper.
  • Prepare the cake mix according to package directions for oil, water, and eggs. Stir to combine.
  • Once the ingredients are fully mixed together, add in the crushed half of the strawberries. Using a spatula, fold them in so they are incorporated throughout.
  • Pour the prepared batter into the greased 13×9 baking pan.
  • Bake your cake at 350 degrees F (177 degrees C) for 34-38 minutes or until a toothpick comes out clean in the center.
  • Once baked, place the pan on a cooling rack and allow the cake to cool completely for about 2 hours.
  • Add the remaining freeze-dried strawberries to your food processor and add the shortbread cookies. Pulse 8-10 times or until the mixture resembles crumbs. Set aside. **Do not over-process this mixture, you want the mixture to be crunchy.

Frosting

  • In the bowl of your electric mixer add the butter. Using a whisk attachment, beat the butter until softened. About 1 minute (if the butter is not at room temperature).
  • Add the salt and vanilla extract and mix until incorporated.
  • Slowly add in the powdered sugar about ½ cup at a time. Beat on medium-low speed, scraping down the sides making sure to incorporate the butter and sugar. Then increase the speed to medium until all of the powdered sugar has been incorporated. Add 1-2 tablespoons of milk if the frosting becomes too thick.
  • Once the cake has completely cooled, top the cake with the frosting and smooth it out so it’s even over the whole cake.
  • Gently sprinkle the prepared strawberry crumb mixture over the top of the frosted cake, making sure to evenly coat the top of the cake. Slice the cake and enjoy!

Video

Notes

  • *Use the water, oil, and egg measurements from your cake mix box.
  • If you do not have a food processor to process the shortbread cookies and freeze-dried strawberries, adding them to a large zip bag (like a freezer ziplock bag) and using a rolling pin to process them into a textured crumb will also work.

Nutrition

Calories: 459kcal | Carbohydrates: 62g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 67mg | Sodium: 327mg | Potassium: 28mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 48g | Vitamin A: 309IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 79mg | Iron: 1mg

Lemon Poke Cake

Wow! This Lemon Poke Cake is an absolute stunner. Just 4 ingredients (plus cake mix ingredients) and dessert will bring the perfect presentation to the table. Served chilled, this cake is super refreshing on a warm summer day.

Slice of lemon poke cake on white plate.

It goes to the top of the list when it comes to our easy cake recipes, and dare I say… easy dessert recipes!

I love when recipes are so easy to make! These are quick pantry ingredients you probably always have on hand. You do need a few hours’ warning to make this, but it’s so delicious it will be worth the wait.

If summer is already fading, try your hand at a Pumpkin Poke Cake! It’s so easy to make dessert from anything you have on hand.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 4 ingredients (plus the ingredients for your cake mix), this recipe couldn’t get any easier!
  • Make-ahead recipe: This keeps for 3 days in the fridge, so it’s perfect for making at least the day before serving.
  • Easy to customize: Pick your flavor of cake and pudding for the ultimate custom dessert.

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, some simple ingredients are all you need.

Labeled ingredients for lemon poke cake on white counter.
  • Cake mix – Brand doesn’t matter, just pick the one you like the flavor of and generally use.
  • Pudding – Lemon lovers unite! I chose lemon pudding to match the lemon cake. Make sure and grab “instant” and also NOT sugar-free.
  • Milk – Low-fat is fine here, whatever you normally keep in the fridge.
  • Cool whip – I go full-fat here because this is a treat!

Nope, no real lemon is used in this recipe but if you have real lemons to use, these lemon blondies are what you should try instead.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Pudding – if you happen to grab the “cook and serve” version, that’s fine! Just prepare it according to the box and NOT with the milk in the recipe card.
  • Jello – have jello on hand and no pudding? Save a trip to the store – poke cake is often made with jello so just use that instead! Prepare as the box states and pour over the cake (no milk).

Variations

Not a lemon fan? No worries! This poke cake works no matter what you love!

  • Flavor – think of this as a framework rather than a must-follow-instructions sort of recipe. You can select whatever cake flavor you want and then add a pudding that matches or complements.
  • Color – got a special occasion? Think about selecting a flavor that adds to the party decor. Strawberry cake with vanilla pudding for a baby shower, school colors, or the guest of honor’s favorite color.

How to Make Pudding Poke Cake

There are just 3 easy steps to get this cake on the table:

  • bake the cake
  • pour on the pudding
  • chill, top, and serve

Make the cake the night before a party or gathering, or even first thing in the morning for a dinner party.

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-4 on how to make lemon poke cake.

STEP 1. Bake the cake. Prepare the cake according to the box directions and let cool completely.

STEP 2. Poke the cake. Use the handle of a wooden spoon to make evenly spaced holes across the entire cake.

Tip: You want to use something about ¼” in diameter to poke the holes in the cake to ensure the holes are large enough to create pockets of pudding. I find thin-handled wooden spoons are perfect for this. 

STEP 3. Mix the pudding. Whisk by hand until the pudding just begins to thicken.

Steps 5-8 on how to make lemon poke cake.

STEP 4. Spread on the pudding. Evenly spread the pudding over the cake, taking time to push pudding into each hole.

STEP 5. Chill. Let the cake chill for at least two hours before proceeding and serving.

STEP 6. Top and serve. Spread whipped topping over the entire cake and then top with slices of lemon or zest for an extra special presentation.

Lemon poke cake in cake pan with lemon slices on top.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Allow to fully cool. Make sure your cake is totally cool so the pudding doesn’t melt.
  • Whipped cream. Not a fan of cool whip? You can definitely make homemade whipped cream from heavy cream to top the cake. Because it doesn’t have stabilizers, you won’t want to do this step until just before serving.
Slice of lemon poke cake on white plate, with lemon slice on top.

Recipe FAQs

What is a poke cake?

Seems like a silly question, right? But it’s simply due to poking literal holes in the cake. This is necessary because while cakes with a simple syrup or milk poured over don’t need holes, a thicker ingredient like jello or pudding must have somewhere to go! These are also known as “poke and pour” cakes since you are pouring the the fun ingredient on after poking holes.

What goes in a poke cake?

While we used pudding here, poke cake can be made with jello, kool aid, sweetened condensed milk, caramel…the list goes on! But essentially just bake a cake and poke holes once cooled. Add a fun filling and topping and that’s it! All pantry ingredients are used so you can make a poke cake on a whim.

How far ahead can I make a poke cake?

No one likes dry cake, and that’s the benefit of adding a filling via poking. I recommend making this cake the day ahead or the morning of a dinner party, giving it just enough time to chill. You can keep this for up to 3 days, but I find you risk the cake starting to fall apart due to moisture as it reaches the end of those 3 days.

What to Serve with Lemon Poke Cake

This cake is great for a crowd, so you shouldn’t need much else on the side! You can always serve up fresh berries to be enjoyed next to or on top of the cake. This would be a perfect dessert to bring outside after everyone finishes up their Aloha Burgers.

Fork holding a bite of lemon poke cake, above slice of cake.

Storage

Store leftover cake in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just remember that this cake can get fairly wet from the filling, so the sooner you eat it up the better! Also, if using homemade whipped cream rather than whipped topping, you risk the topping “breaking down” the longer it sits.

More Lemon Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Slice of lemon poke cake on white plate, with lemon wedge on top.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Lemon Poke Cake

This Lemon Poke Cake will give you a cold blast of summer in a super easy dessert. The pudding mix makes this so moist and delicous.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Chill Time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 35 minutes
Servings 12 servings
Calories 317kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 1 box lemon cake mix 15.25 ounces
  • Ingredients to prepare cake mix per instructions oil, eggs, etc.
  • 2 boxes instant lemon pudding mix 3.4 ounces each
  • 3 ½ cups cold milk
  • 1 tub Cool Whip, thawed 8 ounces

Instructions

  • Prepare cake mix according to the package directions and bake in a 9×13 pan. Leave cake to cool completely.
  • Poke holes over the cake every 1-1 ½ inches using the handle of a wooden spoon.
  • Whisk the lemon pudding mix and milk by hand in a large bowl until it just begins to thicken, about 2 minutes.
  • Carefully pour the pudding over the cake. Use an offset spatula to spread it into an even layer, making sure to press the pudding down into the holes.
  • Set the cake in the refrigerator to chill for at least two hours to allow the pudding the set.
  • When ready to serve, spread the Cool Whip over the top of the cake. Garnish with lemon slices for the perfect presentation.

Video

Notes

  • Store leftovers in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • If you love lemon, fold one tablespoon of lemon zest into the cake batter or pudding for extra tang.
  • Be sure to use instant pudding mix and not the cook-and-serve kind. If you have the cook-and-serve kind, prepare according to the box and not the milk in the ingredients list here.
  • You want to use something about ¼” in diameter to poke the holes in the cake to ensure the holes are large enough to create pockets of pudding. I find thin-handled wooden spoons are perfect for this.
  • The lemon pudding can be substituted with lemon jello, although I like the added creaminess the pudding adds to the cake.
  • Use two cups of homemade whipped cream instead of whipped topping if desired.

Nutrition

Calories: 317kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 451mg | Potassium: 162mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 27g | Vitamin A: 189IU | Calcium: 199mg | Iron: 1mg

20 Unique Charcuterie Boards

Charcuterie boards are my favorite party food option. They are so beautifully arranged, and typically feature a variety of different meats (and fun salami roses), cheeses, fruits, nuts, and other accompaniments.

They allow you and your guests to sample a bit of everything and find new favorite combinations. You can also make them based on your budget, using a variety of produce, deli meats, and pieces of cheese.

Unique charcuterie board ideas collage.

If you are looking for ideas to make your own charcuterie boards at home, then you are going to love this collection of 20 Unique Charcuterie Boards.

With ideas like skinny boards with low-calorie foods, to taco boards with all of the fixings, I know you will find a few ideas to make in your home kitchen.

Pair a  favorite drink recipe with one of these unique charcuterie boards. 

waffles and fruits on a board

Waffle Charcuterie by Fantabulosity

This waffle board is perfect for breakfast or brunch. Add lots of fresh fruits and a variety of waffles so everyone can have their breakfast just how they like it.

skinny charcuterie board

Skinny Charcuterie by Make It Skinny

This spread of snacks is low calorie for a healthy option that looks elegant and still tastes great. Use fresh fruits, small chunks of cheese and low carb crackers to offer a variety that everyone can enjoy.

breakfast board with eggs, waffles, fruit

Breakfast Charcuterie Board  by Feast and Fam

Make a healthy breakfast board for a leisurely weekend breakfast, or as a show stopping brunch! With so many fresh ingredients like eggs, waffles, berries and meat, this has something for everyone!

Italian meats, cheese, vegetables

Italian Charcuterie Board by Little Farro Kitchen

This charcuterie board has imported cheeses, deli meats, tasty olives and a sweet bite with honeycomb! This fancy little feast is perfect for a dinner party with friends.

fresh fruits on a charcuterie board

Fruit Charcuterie Board by Blackberry Babe

Offer your guests all of the summer fruits with a creamy dip that they are going to love. This colorful option is healthy, delicious and easy to assemble.

Mediterranean flavors in a charcuterie board

Mediterranean Snack Board by Food Wine and Love

Pair your cocktail hour with a variety of tasty vegan snacks. This board is easy to assemble but has an assortment of ingredients for endless combinations of flavors.

Taco meats, cheese and shells with fresh veggies

Taco Charcuterie Platter by The Soccer Mom

Make a charcuterie platter that brings loads of taco flavor to your next gathering. Add fresh veggies, meat and cheeses for a build your own taco night that everyone will love.

Jars of charcuterie ingredients

Jarcuterie by Inspired by Charm

This idea makes for individual charcuteries that your guests can grab and carry around to snack on as they mingle. You are going to love how easy these are to assemble.

Burrata charcuterie board

Burrata Board by Princess Pinky Girl

If you like burrata cheese, then you are going to love this board! It has  a perfect balance of sweet, savory and salty options for dipping! Peaches, berries, meats and snap peas are so good with burrata cheese.

charcuterie cones with fresh fruits and veggies

Charcuterie Cones by A Grateful Meal

These yummy charcuterie cones are perfect for a party. They have a great portion of snackable ingredients in an easy to assemble paper cone.

red white and blue snacks arranged on a charcuterie board

Red, White and Blue Charcuterie Board by Plant Based on a Budget

This charcuterie board is so festive for the summer holidays. It is made with vegan options for an inclusive and fun snack to share.

Mezza platter

Mezze Platter by My Chefs Apron

This platter of Mediterranean flavors makes perfect party food. With fresh veggies, tasty dips, and cheese, you are going to love the flavorful combinations you can create.

Beer Cheese Fondue Board by Barley and Sage

Add a cheesy twist to your next charcuterie night with this beer cheese fondue recipe. It pairs perfectly with anything you want to dip into it! Veggies, meat, pretzels, or bread taste amazing in this.

summer cheese board with burrata, peaches

Summer Cheese Platter by Life As a Strawberry

This board is packed with delicious cheeses and fresh veggies. Add an assortment of breads and fruits to make a grazing board that everyone will love.

Bagel board with fruit, eggs and meat

Bagel Charcuterie Board by Whole Lot of Yum

If you like bagels, you are going to love this board! With cream cheese, fruits, veggies, meats and all of the toppings you can make your dream bagel for an awesome breakfast, brunch or lunch.

red and blue berries with white cheese and crackers

Patriotic Charcuterie Board by Healthy Family Project

This board is packed with red, white and blue ingredients for a summer snack board that is healthy and wholesome.

Breakfast summer cheese board

Summer Charcuterie Platter by Britney Breaks Bread

This is one epic board for a summer party. It has perfect boiled eggs, fresh fruits, and flaky croissants for a summer spread that has something healthy for everyone.

Bloody mary charcuterie board with olives, celery

Bloody Mary Charcuterie Board by Amanda’s Cookin’

This is the brunch board to offer if you are serving bloody marys for brunch! It has all of the toppings that you could dream of in a fancy bloody mary.

Italian meats and cheeses on charcuterie board

Italian Charcuterie  by Tulips and Twill

This spread is loaded with Italian meats and cheese. Sprinkle in plenty of olives, dates and crackers, and you have a crowd pleasing snack to share.

Charduderie board with meaty offerings

Charduderie by Cuss Kitchen

This spread isn’t elegant, but it has so many tasty finger food snacks! Make this for a game day party, or for a family BBQ to offer something for everyone.

Quick Tips for Making a Charcuterie Board:

  • Use a variety of ingredients. Look to add color and texture to your board by selecting produce in various colors.
  • Arrange your ingredients in a visually appealing manner. Use shapes, layering heights, and serving tools to make your presentation stand out.

Find more entertaining ideas here:

You must use the category name, not a URL, in the category field.

The BEST No Bake Cookies Recipe

The BEST No Bake Cookies Recipe with Chocolate, Oatmeal, and Peanut Butter: The classic recipe that uses milk, butter, sugar, cocoa, peanut butter, and oats! Plus, the pro-tips that will help you make sure they turn out every time!

No bake cookies on aluminum foil.
  • Chocolate no bake cookies?
  • Chocolate peanut butter no bake cookies?
  • No bake chocolate oatmeal cookies?
  • No bake oatmeal cookies?

I’m not sure what you may call them… because I’ve heard them called all SORTS of different names, but we talk about them so much that we’ve just shortened it to “no bakes” around here.

If you love easy cookies, you’ll also love these Monster cookies , these Peanut Butter Chocolate Chip Cookies, the No Bake S’mores Cheesecake Recipe, our Gluten Free, Oatmeal Breakfast Cookies, and these Chocolate and Peanut Butter Energy Bites – No Bake!

Peanut butter and chocolate also pair well in a Lazy Cake – no bake is the ultimate in “lazy cooking.”

Why You’ll Love this Recipe

I’ve hesitated sharing this recipe for no bake cookies, because I felt like EVERYONE must already have a recipe and know what no bake cookies are. Right?! Wrong.

Or at least they’ve been made by others but so many have had trouble with other recipes hardening and turning out. But this recipe never fails me, and you’ll see why in the PRO TIPS below!

How to Make No Bake Cookies

They’re really easy, and the PERFECT recipe for someone just starting out in the kitchen. (I actually think this was the very first cookie recipe I tackled as a little girl too! It’s kind of neat actually to be sharing this with you today since I had NO idea back then that this blogging “thing” would even exist, where I share my favorite recipes.)

Using everyday ingredients, that you probably already have on hand, you’ll cook them on the stovetop and they’ll air-dry on the counter. No baking required!

The full, printable recipe card is at the bottom of this post.

Step 1: Butter, Sugar, Milk, Cocoa

Combine the following ingredients in a saucepan on the stovetop. (Not turning the burner on just yet.)

Vanilla Extract: I don’t like adding vanilla extract to no bakes but if you prefer it, you can add 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract at the same time you add the milk.

TIP: This is a GREAT time to place a piece of aluminum foil out on the countertop, so it is ready for you when the cookies are ready to scoop out.

  • Butter – You’ll be using a stick of butter, which is a half of a cup. Don’t worry about it being softened, cold right out of the refrigerator will work just fine. I also prefer to use salted butter, but unsalted works just fine too! I’ve also used margarine and it works as well.
  • Sugar – 2 cups of white granulated sugar
  • Milk – I usually use 2%, but have used whole and skim before as well, so using whatever you have on hand should work just fine! New tip: I’ve been out of milk before and have used caramel-flavored almond milk coffee creamer, and it worked too! Plus, it added a touch of caramel flavor it was delicious!
  • Cocoa – 4 tablespoons of unsweetened cocoa
Stick of butter in white saucepan.
1 stick of butter
Sugar and butter in white saucepan.
2 cups of sugar
Milk added to sugar and butter in white saucepan
½ cup of milk
Cocoa powder added to white sauce pan with other ingredients.
4 Tablespoons of Cocoa

Step 2: Mix & Boil

Turn the burner on to medium-high heat, and begin stirring so the butter will melt.

Step 3: Boil for 1 Minute

Once the butter has melted, stop stirring to allow the mixture to come to a boil.

PRO TIP: Once all of the chocolate mixture starts boiling, (not just a bubble here and there — wait until it all starts boiling, and if the boiling starts in the middle, wait until it reaches the sides) begin timing the boil, stir slowly and constantly, and let it boil for 1 minute.

Remove from heat.

Ingredients melting in white saucepan.
Melt & Boil

Step 4: Add in Peanut Butter

Once the saucepan has been moved away from the heat, add, and stir in the peanut butter until completely mixed in.

PRO TIP: The brand of peanut butter matters! I used generic peanut butter for years but using creamy, Jif or Skippy, are now my favorites to use and it makes such a difference!

⅓ cup peanut butter in chocolate mixture in saucepan.
⅓ cup peanut butter

Step 5: Add the Oats

Pour in 3 cups of oats and stir until combined.

Tip: I’ve found “quick oats” are better than old-fashioned oats for no bake cookies but old-fashioned oats will work.

3 cups of oats added to saucepan.
3 cups oats

Step 6: Quickly Spoon Out Cookies

This is where you’ll want to be quick and spoon out cookies with a tablespoon, on to a sheet of aluminum foil.

Oats mixed in to the chocolate mixture in saucepan.
Mix in oats

Leaving them in the hot pan will allow the cookies to continue to cook and harden, resulting in a very crumbly cookie.

Cookies spooned out on to aluminum foil to set.
Spoon on to foil

Step 7: Rest for 20 minutes

Let the cookies rest for at least 20 minutes to harden.

To see if the cookies have set, you should be able to pick up the cookies with your hand.

Hardened cookies ready for eating.

Storage

Once hardened and cooled, store in an air-tight container and enjoy within a couple of days as they can tend to dry out.

Classic no bake cookies - oatmeal chocolate peanut butter recipe

If you’ve fallen in love with these no bake cookies, then I know you’re also going to love this 3-ingredient peanut butter fudge, this chocolate peanut butter bars too and these chewy oatmeal raisin cookies! They’re also a favorite in our house! Or, give these cake mix peanut butter cookies a whirl, too!

Recipe

No bake cookies on aluminum foil.
Print Pin
4.75 from 36 votes

The BEST No Bake Cookies

No Bake Cookies Recipe with Chocolate Oatmeal and Peanut Butter: The classic recipe that uses milk, butter, sugar, cocoa, peanut butter and oats!
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 1 minute
Resting Time 20 minutes
Total Time 26 minutes
Servings 16 cookies
Calories 245kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • ½ cup salted butter 1 stick
  • 2 cups white granulated sugar
  • ½ cup milk 2%, whole or skim
  • 4 Tablespoons cocoa
  • ⅓ cup peanut butter Creamy is my favorite and JIF or Skippy are preferred over generic. It makes a difference!
  • 3 cups oats quick or old-fashioned
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract optional

Instructions

  • Place a piece of aluminum foil, approximately a foot long, out on the counter. You'll be scooping out the cookies on to this to let dry once they're finished cooking.
  • In a large sauce pan place ½ cup salted butter, 2 cups white granulated sugar½ cup milkand 4 Tablespoons cocoaand turn burner on to medium-high heat.
    Some prefer adding vanilla extract to this recipe, however I don't like them with vanilla. If would like vanilla, add 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract at the same time as the milk.
  • Stirring to combine, cook until butter has melted.
  • Next, and PRO TIP: Once all of the chocolate mixture starts boiling, (not just a bubble here and there — wait until it all starts boiling) begin timing the boil, stir slowly and constantly, and let it boil for 1 minute.
  • After one minute of boiling, remove from heat
  • Mix in ⅓ cup peanut butter and stir until combined
  • Add in 3 cups oats and stir until evenly mixed
  • QUICKLY, using a spoon, scoop out a tablespoon of cookie mixture on to your prepared aluminum foil, making approximately 16-20 cookies.
  • Let cookies sit for about 20 minutes or until the cookies have hardened and you can pick them up off of the aluminum foil.

Video

Notes

TIP: Spread out a piece of aluminum foil on to the counter before you start making the cookies so it will be ready and you can quickly spoon out the cookies.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 245kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 80mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 190IU | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

Walking Strawberry Cheesecake

Indulge in the delightful fusion of a classic dessert with a fruity twist – presenting our Walking Strawberry Cheesecake! This scrumptious creation combines the best of both worlds: the rich, creamy goodness of cheesecake and the refreshing, juicy sweetness of strawberries. They’re the perfect easy dessert for hosting a party or even just as an after-school snack idea!

Walking dessert in dish, with plastic spoon sticking out of Teddy Graham bag.

Perfect for any occasion, this simple dessert will have your taste buds dancing in delight, leaving you craving for more. So, if you’re ready to make desserts super simple, keep on reading as we unveil the magic behind this fantastic recipe. 

If you have strawberries left after this recipe, why not try this tasty sweet treat; Cheesecake Stuffed Strawberries or Strawberry Cheesecake Bites that are almost too cute to eat! Or make a Strawberry Cream Cheese Ice Box Cake for those hot summer days.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love This Recipe

  • It uses a few ingredients: With only 5 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
  • Eat on the go: Once you’ve mixed the pudding mix, there’s nothing more needed than a spoon for each portion.
  • Ready in only 15 minutes: Want a super quick and easy idea? This recipe, from start to finish, only takes 15 minutes.

What is Walking Cheesecake?

Walking desserts, such as this fun cheesecake, are portable twists on the classic cheesecake dessert that allows you to enjoy its deliciousness on-the-go! It involves adding instant pudding mix, usually cheesecake flavored, to a bag of crushed graham crackers, along with fresh strawberries or your favorite fruit. 

This delightful concoction creates a mess-free, handheld treat that can be easily enjoyed as you walk, at picnics, or during any outdoor event. Say goodbye to the hassle of plates and relish in the convenience and scrumptiousness of walking cheesecake – a dessert that’s perfect for those with a sweet tooth or who crave sweet indulgence anytime, anywhere!

Ingredients Needed

I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

Labeled ingredients for walking cheesecakes.
  • Cheesecake mix – To keep everything simple, use an instant cheesecake mix to create this simple dessert.
  • Teddy Grahams – Make sure you get the individual serving bags of Teddy Grahams for this recipe.
  • Strawberries – Fresh strawberries are best for this recipe, slice them up and mix them with the cool whip.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Cheesecake Mix: Instead of instant cheesecake mix, you can use instant vanilla or white chocolate pudding mix for a similar creamy texture and sweetness.
  • Cool Whip: To replace Cool Whip, you can opt for homemade whipped cream (made by whipping heavy cream with sugar and vanilla extract) or use a dairy-free whipped topping, such as coconut whipped cream, for a vegan alternative.
  • Strawberries: Fresh strawberries can be replaced with other fruits like blueberries, raspberries, blackberries, or diced peaches for a different fruit pairing. 

Variations

There are numerous variations you can try to give your Walking Cheesecake a unique twist. Here are some ideas to inspire your creativity:

  • Chocolate Lovers: Use chocolate-flavored instant pudding mix and add chocolate chips or chocolate shavings to the mixture. You can also use crushed Oreos or chocolate graham crackers instead of regular graham crackers.
  • Tropical Delight: Use a combination of diced mango, pineapple, and kiwi as your fruit mix, and consider using coconut-flavored instant pudding or adding shredded coconut for an extra tropical touch.
  • Banana Cream: Use banana-flavored instant pudding and add sliced bananas to the mix. You can also drizzle caramel sauce over the top for an added indulgence.
  • Caramel Apple: Add diced apples and a drizzle of caramel sauce to the vanilla pudding mix. You could also sprinkle cinnamon or apple pie spice over the top for a warm, comforting flavor.
  • Lemon Blueberry: Combine lemon-flavored instant pudding with fresh blueberries, and consider adding a bit of lemon zest for an extra burst of citrus flavor.
  • Peanut Butter & Chocolate: Use chocolate-flavored instant pudding and mix in peanut butter chips or swirl in some creamy peanut butter for a delicious, nutty twist.
  • Cherry Almond: Combine vanilla instant pudding with cherry pie filling and sprinkle chopped almonds over the top for a delightful cherry almond flavor combination.

Remember, there’s no limit to the creative combinations you can come up with the easy dessert! Mix and match flavors, fruits, and toppings to create your own unique Walking Cheesecake that suits your taste buds.

How to Make Walking Strawberry Cheesecake

This strawberry cheesecake is broken into 2 components:

  • Make the cheesecake
  • Assemble the dessert

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

STEP 1: Mix the cheesecake. In a medium mixing bowl, combine the pudding mix with milk. Stir the mixture for two minutes, then let it sit for three minutes to set up completely. (Image 1-2)

STEP 2: Prepare the crackers: To easily access the teddy grahams inside, cut open the top of the bags and fold over the edges. 

Steps 1-4 of how to make walking cheesecakes.

STEP 3: Add the pudding. Fill each bag with pudding using a spoon. (Image 3).

STEP 4: Add the strawberries and cool whip. Place the strawberries in the bags and add a generous dollop of cool whip on top. (Image 4).

Walking cheesecake with Cool Whip and strawberries on top.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Prep in advance: To save time, prepare the instant pudding and crush the graham crackers ahead of time. Store them separately in air-tight containers until you’re ready to assemble your Walking Cheesecake.
  • Choose ripe fruits: For the best flavor and texture, use ripe, juicy fruits in your Walking Cheesecake. Wash and dry them thoroughly before dicing or slicing to ensure they don’t make the mixture soggy.
  • Customize portions: Create individual servings of Walking Cheesecake by using small zip-top bags or reusable containers. This makes it easy for everyone to enjoy their own personalized dessert on-the-go.
  • Chill before serving: For an even more refreshing treat, chill your Walking Cheesecake in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes before serving. This will help the flavors meld together and create a firmer, creamier texture.
Walking strawberry cheesecake in Teddy Grahams bags.

Recipe FAQs

Can I make my own pudding from scratch instead of using instant pudding mix?

Yes, you can definitely make your own pudding from scratch for your Walking Cheesecake. Homemade pudding will provide a richer, creamier texture and allows you to control the ingredients. Just be sure to let it cool and thicken before assembling your dessert.

Is it possible to make a vegan or dairy-free version of Walking Cheesecake?

Absolutely! To make a vegan or dairy-free version, use a dairy-free instant pudding mix or a homemade dairy-free pudding recipe. Replace Cool Whip with a dairy-free whipped topping like coconut whipped cream, and use dairy-free graham crackers or cookies for the base.

Can I freeze Walking Cheesecake for later consumption?

While it’s possible to freeze Walking Cheesecake, the texture may change once thawed, especially if it contains fruits. If you do decide to freeze it, store individual portions in airtight containers or freezer-safe zip-top bags. When ready to consume, let the portions thaw in the refrigerator for several hours or overnight. Keep in mind that the texture might be slightly different, but it should still taste delicious.

How can I make a gluten-free Walking Cheesecake?

To make a gluten-free Walking Cheesecake, simply replace regular graham crackers with gluten-free graham crackers or another type of gluten-free cookie. Also, make sure to check the labels on your instant pudding mix and whipped topping to ensure they are gluten-free as well.

Can I use frozen fruit instead of fresh fruit for my Walking Cheesecake?

It’s best to use fresh fruit for your Walking Cheesecake because frozen fruit can release excess moisture when thawed, making the dessert soggy. However, if you only have access to frozen fruit, make sure to thaw it completely, drain any excess liquid, and pat the fruit dry with a paper towel before adding it to your dessert.

Assembled walking strawberry cheesecakes in dish.

Storage

To store leftover pudding portions, follow these simple steps:

  1. Choose the right container: Transfer the leftover pudding into an airtight container or individual serving bowls with lids. Glass or plastic containers with tight-fitting lids work well in preventing air exposure, which can cause the pudding to form a skin or become dry.
  2. Cover the surface: If you’re using a container without a lid or want extra protection against skin formation, press a piece of plastic wrap directly onto the surface of the pudding. This will create a barrier that prevents air from coming into contact with the pudding.
  3. Refrigerate: Place the covered container or bowl in the refrigerator. It’s best to store pudding in the coldest part of the fridge, away from the door where temperatures tend to fluctuate.
  4. Consume within a few days: Leftover pudding is best enjoyed within 3-4 days of preparation. Before eating, check for any signs of spoilage, such as off smells, mold, or changes in texture.

Remember that instant puddings tend to set more firmly over time, so the texture might be slightly different when consuming leftovers. If you notice the pudding has become too thick, you can gently fold in a small amount of milk or whipped cream to loosen it before serving.

More Cheesecake Style Recipes You’ll Love

If you are looking for a more traditional cheesecake recipe, try this Strawberry Crunch Cheesecake instead. Or if you want something more citrus based, try this Orange Fluff Salad that’s perfect for a party. You could also use any leftover berries for a Mixed Berry Mini Trifle as well. Or, you’ll love these cake favorites:

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Recipe

Walking cheesecake dessert in baking dish.
Print Pin
5 from 1 vote

Walking Strawberry Cheesecake

Walking Strawberry Cheesecake: This scrumptious creation combines the best of both worlds: the rich, creamy goodness of cheesecake and the refreshing, juicy sweetness of strawberries. 
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 8 bags
Calories 1787kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Ingredients

  • 5.1 ounce box cheesecake pudding mix
  • 2 cups milk
  • 8 packages single serving Teddy Grahams
  • 1 cup strawberries diced
  • 1 cup cool whip

Instructions

  • In a medium mixing bowl, combine the pudding mix and milk. Stir the mixture for two minutes and allow it to sit for three minutes to set up completely.
  • Cut open the tops of the bags of teddy grahams and flip over the edges of the bag.
  • Spoon the pudding into each bag.
  • Add the strawberries to the bags and top with a dollop of cool whip.

Notes

TIP: Chill before serving: For an even more refreshing treat, chill your Walking Cheesecake in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes before serving. This will help the flavors meld together and create a firmer, creamier texture.

Nutrition

Serving: 1bag | Calories: 1787kcal | Carbohydrates: 318g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 43g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 2721mg | Potassium: 851mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 99g | Vitamin A: 117IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 410mg | Iron: 17mg

Aloha Burgers

This Aloha Burger recipe is filled with all the best parts of summer. Crispy bacon, sweet sauce, juicy pineapple, and melted cheese all combine on a perfectly grilled burger to make your backyard the gathering place!

Ever since our baked burgers have gone viral, and have become a reader favorite, we’ve started sharing more and more burger recipes with you and it has been so fun to share the different variations!

Aloha burger on white plate.

Do you love grilling as much as I do?? When it’s summer, I just can’t wait to get outside. Plus I know in a lot of households, the main cook isn’t always the grill person in the family! So it can mean a bit of a break as well. And if you don’t have room on the grill next to these burgers, did you know you can make corn on the cob in the Instant Pot? It is really tasty!

You also can’t go wrong with a classic Red-Skinned Potato Salad!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You’ll Love These Aloha Burgers

  • It uses pantry ingredients: You likely have everything on hand already, even though it seems like a long list!
  • Feed a group: As written, you can make 6 or 8 burgers. Perfect for short notice extra guests. You can also very easily double this one or even make sliders.
  • Ready in under 30 minutes: Talk about a quick and easy dinner idea! You can whip these up in no time flat.

Ingredients Needed

It might seem like a lot of ingredients for aloha burgers but they are all items that you have in the pantry, especially for grilling season.

Labeled ingredients for Aloha burgers.
  • Ground beef – I like an 80/20 mix but you can mix and match your fat levels or even use some ground turkey as well! That’s the best part about forming your own burgers. See more of our ground beef dinner ideas!
  • Pineapple – Fresh or canned both work well. If using fresh, you’ll need to buy juice separately. Also keep in mind that sometimes fresh pineapple bothers some people’s mouths! When canned, the enzyme that causes that is deactivated by heat.
  • Bacon – Thick, thin, peppery or mapley! Whatever your favorite is will go well here. And since it’s cooked ahead, it’s easy to make BLTs one night and save some bacon for these burgers.
  • Teriyaki sauce – This helps add some sweetness inside our burgers and I love using this teriyaki recipe without ginger.
  • BBQ sauce – I love to add this on top of the finished burger to hold the bacon on! Pick a sweet or spicy.
  • Havarti – The strong flavor here helps the cheese get noticed.

Substitutions

Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

  • Cheese – not a fan of havarti? Provolone or Swiss also work well here.
  • Meat – you can use ground chicken or turkey for some of the beef to reduce the fat content. There are so many flavors at play here that it’s a great recipe for poultry.

Equipment

I love the taste of grilled burgers, but you can absolutely make burgers on the stove on a grill pan if rain has brought the party inside.

Nothing beats an instant-read thermometer. This is truly the only way to tell when a burger has reached your desired finished temp. Never cut a burger open to check the color – it will lose all the juices plus won’t sit nicely on the bun anymore.

Where Did Hawaiian Burgers Originate?

Unlike many foods that are named from a cuisine, but really didn’t come from there (hello, French fries!) pineapple really is a big part of Hawaiian culture. The pineapple stands for hospitality so it only makes sense to pop it on top of a grilled burger you make for friends.

How to Make BBQ Bacon Burgers

Cook your bacon ahead of time, whether that’s the day before or even right on the grill before the burgers. Cooking it on the grill means no messy stovetop! Set out all your toppings so they are ready to go and then mix everything up and grill. Super quick and easy!

*Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

Steps 1-3 for making Aloha burgers.

STEP 1. In a large bowl add the ground beef through pineapple juice. Gently mix together until just combined.

STEP 2. Divide the ground beef mixture into 6 equal parts for ⅓ pound burgers or 8 equal parts for ¼ pound burgers.

Tip: To get your burgers all the same size, use a kitchen scale to weigh each one. A third pound burger will be 5.3 ounces, a quarter pound will be 4 ounces.

STEP 3. Gently roll each portion into a ball, then gently flatten into a circle. I make a fairly larger indentation in the center of each patty to keep them from puffing up too much as they cook.

Steps 4 through 5 for how to make aloha burgers.

STEP 4. Heat the grill to 400°. Grill the onion and pineapple slices first to get a great char, and then let rest on a plate or over indirect heat.

STEP 5. Cook the burgers with the lid closed, flipping once. Place a slice of cheese on each burger and cook for 1 more minute.

Tip: Use an instant read thermometer to check the temperature like this Instant Read Thermometer.

STEP 6. Let the burgers rest on a plate, covered, for 5 minutes. You don’t want to lose any juices!

STEP 7. Place each burger on a bun spread with mayo, top with a grilled pineapple slice, grilled onion slice, bacon, teriyaki sauce, barbecue sauce, lettuce, and any other toppings you desire.

Building an aloha burger with all of the toppings on a white plate and white counter.

Recipe Pro Tips

  • Do not overmix the beef. Working the mixture too much will result in tough meat. Your hands work great for mixing and distributing. You can also use a stand mixer on the lowest setting to combine the ingredients.
  • It’s common to use your thumb to make the indent in the patty. I recommend making the indentation a bit wider than that. A couple inches should do.
  • Get the grill HOT! The key to your burgers not sticking is a hot grill. 
  • Don’t press your burgers down on the grill, this will dry them out.
Red onion, teriyaki sauce, bacon, lettuce and cheese on burger.

Recipe FAQs

How long do I cook burgers on the grill?

These are the recommended cooking times for burgers:
Rare = 145° 2-2 ½ minutes per side
Med. rare = 160° 3-minutes per side
Well = 170° 3 ½-4 minutes per side

Should I put breadcrumbs or egg in my burger mixture?

It’s a matter of preference. Breadcrumbs can help bind the meat and give the burger a slightly firmer texture. Adding an egg can do the same thing along with adding moisture to the burger. Experiment and see what works best for you.

How do I keep my burgers from falling apart on the grill?

Be gentle when forming the patties, and make sure they’re not overworked. Avoid packing the meat too tightly.

Can I grill frozen burgers?

Yes, you can grill frozen burgers, but it will take longer to cook them. Use a lower heat setting to prevent the outside from burning while the inside thaws and cooks.

What to Serve with Aloha Burgers

I love a good, sturdy burger, and those with smaller appetites may be happy with just this massive pineapple burger on their plates. You can definitely serve up cocktails for a crowd while the burgers cook, and I highly recommend some Elote Dip recipe with chips.

Close up of aloha burger with all of the toppings.

Storage

If you have any leftover burgers, keep the patties in the fridge for a couple days. Give them a quick reheat in a small skillet before assembling a burger.

More Burger Recipes You’ll Love

Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

Love that sweet and salty combo? You’ll also love those flavors in this restaurant-style teriyaki chicken.

Recipe

Aloha burger on white plate.
Print Pin
5 from 4 votes

Aloha Burgers

A juicy burger patty with a teriyaki glaze and pineapple ring takes your favorite burger to a whole new level!
Course Dinner
Cuisine American
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 7 minutes
Total Time 22 minutes
Servings 6 burgers
Calories 995kcal
Author Jessica Burgess

Equipment

  • Grill or grill pan
  • Long handled spatula
  • Stand mixer (optional for mixing meat)

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds ground beef
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon pepper
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground ginger
  • 2 tablespoons low sodium soy sauce
  • 2 tablespoons pineapple juice
  • 1 large red onion sliced into 6 slices
  • 6 pineapple slices fresh or canned
  • 6 slices cooked bacon
  • 6 slices havarti cheese
  • Green leaf lettuce
  • 6 soft hamburger buns such as brioche or Hawaiian
  • ¼ cup mayo
  • ½ cup teriyaki sauce homemade teriyaki recipe or store bought
  • ½ cup honey or brown sugar barbecue sauce
  • Optional toppings: tomato, bell pepper, pickles

Instructions

  • In a large bowl add the ground beef, salt, pepper, garlic powder, onion powder, ginger, soy sauce and pineapple juice. Gently mix together until well combined.
  • Divide the ground beef mixture into 6 equal parts for ⅓ pound burgers or 8 equal parts for ¼ pound burgers.
  • Gently roll each portion into a ball, then flatten it between your hands, gently shaping into a circle. Indent the center of the patty. This helps prevent it from puffing up too much in the center while cooking.
  • Heat the grill to 400°. Place the onion slices and pineapple slices on the grill grates. Cook for about 3 minutes to char them and get some good grill marks. Remove to a plate or to indirect heat on your grill.
  • Place the patties on the grill, and close the lid. For medium burgers, cook for 3 minutes, then flip the burgers, close the lid and cook for an additional 2 minutes. Place a slice of cheese on each burger and cook for 1 more minute. (see FAQ’s for additional cooking times)
  • Remove the burgers from the grill. Tent them with foil and let them rest for a good 5 minutes. This allows the juices to redistribute into the meat.
  • Build your burger. Place each burger on a bun spread with mayo, top with a grilled pineapple slice, grilled onion slice, bacon, teriyaki sauce, barbecue sauce, lettuce, and any other toppings you desire.

Notes

  • 80/20 ground beef is best for a juicy burger. You can use a leaner beef if desired; but watch the cooking time so it doesn’t dry out.
  • Use store bought pineapple juice, or use the juice from a can of pineapple.
  • I prefer fresh pineapple, for the best flavor but canned works.
  • If you like a kick, add red pepper flakes to the ground beef, or use a spicy barbecue sauce.

Nutrition

Serving: 1burger | Calories: 995kcal | Carbohydrates: 65g | Protein: 50g | Fat: 59g | Saturated Fat: 27g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 283mg | Sodium: 2635mg | Potassium: 753mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 1034IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 274mg | Iron: 5mg